Quarterlytics / Personal Products & Services / XPS Pensions Group

XPS Pensions Group

xps · ASX
Claim this profile
Ticker xps
Exchange ASX
Sector
Industry Personal Products & Services
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · XPS Pensions Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
X

P

S

P

e

n

s

i

o

n

s

G

r

o

u

p

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1

responsive
responsible
resilient

XPS Pensions Group plc
Annual Report and Accounts
2021

 
 
 
 
 
Contents

Strategic Report 
Overview 
Business Model  
Strategic Framework 
Market Overview  
Strategic Priorities  
Co-Chief Executives’ Review  
Sustainability  
Non-Financial Information Statement  
Our response to Covid-19  
Financial Review  
Section 172 Statement  
Risk Management  

Governance 
Chairman’s Governance Report  
Board of Directors  
Group Governance at a Glance  
Board Responsibilities  
Board Effectiveness  
Engaging with Our Stakeholders  
Nomination Committee Report  
Audit and Risk Committee Report  
Sustainability Committee Report  
Directors’ Remuneration Report  
Directors’ Report  
Directors’ Responsibility Statement  

Financial Statements 
Independent Auditor’s Report  
Consolidated Statement of  
Comprehensive Income  
Consolidated Statement of  
Financial Position  
Consolidated Statement of  
Changes in Equity  
Consolidated Statement of  
Cash Flows  
Notes to the Consolidated  
Financial Statements  
Statement of Financial  
Position – Company  
Statement of Changes in  
Equity – Company  
Statement of Cash Flows – Company  
Notes to the Financial Statements –  
Company  
Company Information  

2
4
6
8
10
12
16
21
22
24
28
30

34
36
38
40
42
43
44
46
49
50
73
76

77

84

85

86

87

88

122

123
123

124
128

we exist to shape and 
support safe, robust and 
well-understood pension 
schemes for the benefit 
of people and society.

Key performance indicators

Revenue

Adjusted EBITDA1

£128m +7%

£32.0m +5%

2021

2020

£128m

£120m

2021

2020

£32.0m

£30.4m

FTE Employees3

Adjusted diluted earnings per share2

1,325 +10%

9.8p +2%

2021

2020

1,325

1,203

2021

2020

9.8p

9.6p

Proposed full year dividend

Net debt4

6.7p +2%

2021

2020

£50.4m -10%

6.7p

6.6p

2021

2020

£50.4m

£56.1m

Profit before tax

Basic EPS

£11.4m +3%

4.4p +22%

2021

2020

£11.4m

£11.1m

2021

2020

4.4p

3.6p

1 

 Adjusted EBITDA excludes the impact of share-based payment costs, fair value adjustments 
of contingent consideration, and exceptional costs.

2   Adjusted diluted earnings per share from continuing operations. It is based on adjusted 

profit after tax, which excludes the impact of amortisation of intangible assets, share-based 
payment costs, fair value adjustment of contingent consideration, exceptional costs,  
and the tax impact of these items. See Note 6 in the financial statements.

3   As at year end.

4  Excluding lease liabilities.

we would like to say a huge

thank you

to all of our staff who have shown incredible resilience and resourcefulness  
in the face of the pandemic, and worked in partnership with our clients to  
deliver for the members of the pension schemes we serve. 

Our culture and values have been shown more than ever this 
year and we are extremely proud of what XPS has achieved.  

1

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport2

Overview

XPS Pensions Group is the largest  
pure pensions consultancy in the UK.  
We have benefits of scale – we have 
a breadth of experience to draw on 
and can invest in solutions for the 
benefit of our clients – yet we remain 
agile, able to respond quickly as the 
world around our clients shifts.

As the only UK pensions specialist 
listed on the London Stock Exchange 
Main Market, we have the flexibility 
to think and act differently.

16

Locations 

Our 16 locations give us access to staff, 
expertise and clients across the UK.

>1,500

pension scheme clients 

A large and diverse client base.

delivering 
high levels of  
client service

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Why 
invest 
in XPS?

Award-winning 
brand with a  
strong reputation

Diversified and  
long standing  
client base 

A large and diverse client 
base built up of over  
1,500 pension scheme 
clients. Client churn across 
advisory clients was less 
than 2% during the year.

Third Party Administrator  
of the year (Professional 
Pensions), Software of the 
Year Award (Actuarial Post) 
and Technology services of 
the year (Pensions Expert), 
Employee Engagement 
category (UK Employee 
Experience Awards), 
XPS Pensions Group won 
Best Business Culture 
Transformation Initiative 
and the overall Gold Award 
winner for Business Culture. 

Well positioned in  
a long-term market  
with favourable 
regulatory backdrop

£2 trillion liabilities of private 
UK defined benefit pension 
schemes. Regulatory 
developments are driving 
client activity and demand for 
our services. The defined 
contribution market is rapidly 
growing and we are well 
placed to grow our presence 
in the DC consulting space.

Track record  

Experienced  

of positive financial 

management  

performance

team

Scalable,  

well-invested 

technology  

platform

Non-cyclical  

and recurring 

revenues 

XPS has delivered year-on-

Drawn from recognised  

Innovative, cutting edge 

Our services are typically 

year organic revenue 

and blue chip industry 

technology platform  

growth, through a range of 

participants, our Executive 

helps deliver efficient 

macroeconomic conditions 

committee has extensive 

for the past ten years.

experience across the UK 

pensions market.

quality services with 

capacity for organic  

and inorganic growth. 

provided on the basis of an 

open-ended engagement 

with clients and are 

compliance-driven to a 

statutory timetable. They 

are therefore required in all 

parts of the economic cycle.

 
 
 
 
Our services

Advice and support to pension scheme trustees and sponsoring employers across all 
areas of UK pension scheme management, including actuarial advice and long-term 
financial planning for schemes, through to member communications, advice on member 
option exercises and scheme benefit design. 

www.xpsgroup.com/services/xps-pensions/

Clear, independent advice to pension scheme trustees to enable them to make the 
optimum investment decisions for their scheme’s assets. Using financial modelling 
of different mixes of asset classes, we help clients to choose the right portfolio for 
their needs, to maximise returns and/or minimise their level of risk. 

www.xpsgroup.com/services/xps-investment/

Services including pensions administration, payroll services, pension scheme accounting, 
scam identification, de-risking projects and technical consultancy for a wide range of 
trust-based company pension schemes, including defined benefit (‘DB’), defined 
contribution (‘DC’), career average revalued earnings (‘CARE’) and hybrid schemes. 

www.xpsgroup.com/services/xps-administration/

The National Pension Trust is a industry recognised multi-employer DC scheme. XPS 
administration provides the administration and consulting services, and are ‘Founders’ 
of the Trust. The National Pension Trust provides benefits for 47,000 members with 
assets under management of over £1,096m.

https://www.nationalpensiontrust.com/

XPS Self Invested Pensions is an award winning SIPP and SSAS pension provider, trustee, 
and administrator, which has specialised in self invested pensions for more than 40 years. 
While we have been an integral part of XPS Pensions Group for many years, our change 
of name from Xafinity to XPS branding reflects the growing desire of clients and advisers 
to use only the strongest providers with deep professional experience of pensions. 

www.xpsselfinvestedpensions.com/

Award-winning 

brand with a  

Diversified and  

long standing  

strong reputation

client base 

Well positioned in  

a long-term market  

with favourable 

regulatory backdrop

Third Party Administrator  

A large and diverse client 

£2 trillion liabilities of private 

of the year (Professional 

base built up of over  

UK defined benefit pension 

Pensions), Software of the 

1,500 pension scheme 

schemes. Regulatory 

Year Award (Actuarial Post) 

clients. Client churn across 

developments are driving 

and Technology services of 

advisory clients was less 

client activity and demand for 

the year (Pensions Expert), 

than 2% during the year.

our services. The defined 

contribution market is rapidly 

growing and we are well 

placed to grow our presence 

in the DC consulting space.

Employee Engagement 

category (UK Employee 

Experience Awards), 

XPS Pensions Group won 

Best Business Culture 

Transformation Initiative 

and the overall Gold Award 

winner for Business Culture. 

Track record  
of positive financial 
performance

Experienced  
management  
team

Scalable,  
well-invested 
technology  
platform

Non-cyclical  
and recurring 
revenues 

XPS has delivered year-on-
year organic revenue 
growth, through a range of 
macroeconomic conditions 
for the past ten years.

Drawn from recognised  
and blue chip industry 
participants, our Executive 
committee has extensive 
experience across the UK 
pensions market.

Innovative, cutting edge 
technology platform  
helps deliver efficient 
quality services with 
capacity for organic  
and inorganic growth. 

Our services are typically 
provided on the basis of an 
open-ended engagement 
with clients and are 
compliance-driven to a 
statutory timetable. They 
are therefore required in all 
parts of the economic cycle.

3

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
 
 
 
 
4

Business Model

creating value  
through our unique 
business model

What we do

We are a UK-focused specialist  
in pensions actuarial and 
investment consulting and 
administration, providing a range 
of services and solutions to over 
1,500 pension scheme clients. 
We also operate a fully 
authorised defined contribution 
master trust, the National 
Pension Trust, and provide 
administration to SIPPs.

Our 1,300+ people work from  
16 locations around the UK.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Who we work with

We work with pension scheme trustees, 
sponsoring employers and pension scheme 
members, with schemes ranging in size from  
less than £20m in assets to multi-billion  
pound pension funds.

How we earn revenue

We charge fixed fees for ongoing 
administration and advisory services 
combined with time-based fees for 
consulting advice and one-off projects. 
We work with clients on the basis of  
open-ended engagement letters.  
Many of the services we provide are 
essential, non-discretionary requirements 
for UK pension schemes, required on a 
repeating basis to a statutory timetable.  
As such, much of our revenue is 
independent of the economic cycle. 

More than 90% of our revenues are recurring 
and we have a loyal base of clients who have 
worked with us over many years.

Revenue is defined as recurring if it was received from  
a client that had been billed every month (or every quarter) 
consecutively for the previous 12 months over the period to 
31 March 2021. For won and lost clients the revenue is defined 
as recurring if it meets the above criteria for the period they 
were a client.

How we  
maximise value

Clear Strategy
Read page 10

Seizing Market Opportunities
Read page 8

Shared Values

Robust Risk Management

Sound Governance

Read page 42

Read page 30

Read page 44

 
 
 
 
creating value  

through our unique 

business model

What sets us apart

Pure focus on the  
UK pensions market

Expert people and  
empowering culture

Scalable, proprietary  
technology platform

Longstanding client  
relationships

Strong, award-winning brand

Our focused model, combined  
with our blend of scale and  
long-term capital backing, is a 
source of competitive advantage 
that benefits all of our stakeholders.

Generating value for all our 
stakeholders

CLIENTS
• Specialist insight and expertise leading to  

better outcomes

• Quality of service and efficiency through our 

technology platform

• Value for money

EMPLOYEES
• Stimulating working environment and attractive 

career prospects

• First-class training and support towards 

professional qualifications

• Competitive remuneration and benefits

SHAREHOLDERS
• Strong cash generation and dividends. More than 

£44m paid in dividends since listing in 2017

• Track record of growth
• Non-cyclical demand for services

STAKEHOLDERS
Communities:
• Employee involvement in fundraising  

and volunteering

• Positive impact on communities by supporting 

local charities

Regulators and suppliers: 
• Establishing open and fair relationships
• Regular engagement and communication

How we  

maximise value

Clear Strategy

Seizing Market Opportunities

Read page 10

Read page 8

Shared Values
Read page 42

Robust Risk Management
Read page 30

Sound Governance
Read page 44

5

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport6

Strategic Framework

our strategic 
framework

Our 
Purpose

Our 
Vision

Why we exist

We exist to shape and support  

safe, robust and well-understood 

pension schemes for the benefit  

of people and society.

What we want 
to achieve

We are a forward-looking, ambitious  

business. We aim to become the pre-eminent  

independent mid-tier pensions consulting  

firm – the best place for people to work,  

and the best partner for our clients.

Our People
Our Business

>1,300

Employees 

40+ years of providing pension services

94%

Of staff agreed XPS is a  

good company to work for

5

Services 

Pensions, Investment, 

Administration, Self 

Invested pensions & 

National Pension Trust

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Our Values
Our Culture

We are 
ambitious 

We do the  
right thing

 
 
 
 
 
We have a clear strategy to deliver profitable organic growth, providing 
services that have an important societal value, looking after the long term 
financial wellbeing of millions of people in UK pension schemes. 

Our 

Purpose

Our 

Vision

Our Values

Our Culture

Why we exist

We exist to shape and support  
safe, robust and well-understood 
pension schemes for the benefit  
of people and society.

Our Strategic  
Priorities

What we want 

to achieve

We are a forward-looking, ambitious  
business. We aim to become the pre-eminent  
independent mid-tier pensions consulting  
firm – the best place for people to work,  
and the best partner for our clients.

Our People

Our Business

>1,300

Employees 

40+ years of providing pension services

94%

Of staff agreed XPS is a  
good company to work for

5

Services 

Pensions, Investment, 
Administration, Self 
Invested pensions & 
National Pension Trust

Regulatory change

Expand services

Grow market share

Mergers & acquisitions

We are 
agile

We are 
helpful

We are 
experts

Discover more on pages 10-11

7

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
 
 
 
 
8

Market Overview

we operate in a 
specialist market, 
where regulation 
is driving change

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Our primary marketplace 
is the UK workplace 
pensions sector. 

We provide consulting and 
administration services relating to 
defined benefit (DB) and defined 
contribution (DC) schemes. DB 
schemes face significant challenges 
to ensure they are sufficiently 
funded in the long term to provide 
members with their full benefits 
• There are >5,300 DB schemes  

in the UK, with aggregate liabilities 
of over £2 trillion.1

• These schemes are long dated; 
there are 9.9 million DB scheme 
members and 57% are yet to retire. 
Benefit payments from DB schemes 
will continue for decades into the 
future, and are not forecast to peak 
until 15+ years from now.1

These schemes are heavily regulated 
and trustees and companies require 
compliance, investment, actuarial and 
risk management advice in addition to 
cost effective administration services. 

DC pension provision is a growing  
and evolving market. We provide 
consulting and administration services 
to DC schemes, and also operate a  
DC master trust called ‘National 
Pension Trust’.

We also provide administration 
services in the SSAS and SIPP market.

 The Purple Book, PPF, December 2020.

1 
2   Advisory is Pensions Actuarial and Pensions 

Investment consulting.

1,200

Greater than 1,200 advisory2 clients  
at 31 March 2021 

928,000

Members’ pensions we administer 

£1,096m

Assets under Management in NPT 

 
 
 
 
Pensions 
administration 
outsourcing

For many years there has been a 
trend for companies undertaking 
pensions administration ‘in house’ 
to outsource this work to a third 
party. This has been driven by the 
increasing complexity of pension 
regulation. Currently there are 
over 150 large pension schemes 
where the administration has yet 
to be outsourced, and we expect 
a number of these to come to the 
market in the coming years. 

The trend to outsource the 
pensions administration of large 
schemes is likely to accelerate 
following the pandemic as 
in-house teams struggled to be 
able to cope with the sudden  
shift to remote working. 
Alongside the opportunity to  
win ‘first time outsourcings’, early 
contracts from 5-10 years ago are 
now coming up for renewal and 
clients are looking for improved 
service standards, leading to 
organisations switching suppliers. 

With our strong reputation, 
endorsed by our second year 
winning ‘Pensions Administration 
Firm of the Year’ in 2020, XPS is 
well positioned to compete in  
this growing market segment.

Market 
consolidation

With regulations and government 
oversight increasing, there is an 
emerging trend towards the 
consolidation of small DB and DC 
schemes driven by need to drive 
scale to reduce costs, reduce risk 
and enhance governance and 
invest to improve member 
security. XPS has deep expertise 
in the provision of services to 
small schemes and has developed 
a number of service offerings 
to specifically address this 
market opportunity.

More widely, the market of  
service providers is fragmented. 
We expect consolidation to 
continue at all levels within the 
market, particularly at the top end 
and this dynamic presents growth 
opportunities for firms like XPS in 
the ‘mid-tier’. At the other end of 
the spectrum, there is a long tail  
of small providers of consulting 
and administration services,  
and we expect to see these 
consolidate. As the largest 
independent specialist in the 
sector, XPS will take advantage  
of the opportunities this presents 
to grow its business inorganically, 
in line with its strategy.

Key market drivers

Evolving  
regulation

DC Master  
trusts

DC pension provision has  
become much more challenging 
for employers in recent years, 
following the advent in 2015 of 
‘Freedom & Choice’, which meant 
members of such schemes no 
longer needed to purchase an 
annuity at retirement. This, and 
other regulatory changes, have 
made running a single trust DC 
scheme (as many employers did) 
increasingly complex and 
expensive to do.

DC Master Trusts are umbrella 
vehicles that aim to provide a 
workplace pension that can be 
used by multiple unrelated 
employers who can each benefit 
from the economies of scale of  
a larger vehicle to be able to 
provide a high quality modern DC 
scheme in a cost effective way.

The master trust market is 
growing fast, with £38 billion  
AuM as at 31 December 2019*, 
predicted to grow to £200  
billion in 2025 and £340 billion  
in 2030**.

Since 2019 all master trusts 
required authorisation by the 
Pensions Regulator. The 
authorisation process was 
necessarily rigorous and saw the 
number of master trusts reduce 
from over 80 to 38 today***. 

The XPS master trust is called 
National Pension Trust and is  
fully authorised, benefiting  
from these trends.

* 

   2020 Master Trust Survey 
EY Pension Consulting 2020

**  Source: Master Trust and GPP 
Default Report , April 2021 
Corporate Adviser Intelligence

***  Source: The Pensions Regulator 

website April 2021

The new Pensions Act that  
comes into force this year aims  
to provide greater safeguards  
for the DB market. In combination 
with new regulations being 
introduced by the Pensions 
Regulator, it increases the 
pressure on the corporate 
sponsors of pensions schemes 
that are in deficit. The new 
regulations require higher levels 
of funding and/or security for 
schemes, and bring in criminal 
penalties for those who neglect 
their responsibilities to members. 
These developments mean  
our clients need advice on new 
investment and de-risking 
strategies that our Advisory 
division (the combination of 
Pensions Actuarial & Consulting 
and Investment Consulting)  
can provide.

The Competitions and Markets 
Authority (CMA) review also 
continues to drive opportunities 
for our Pensions Investment 
Consulting division in the area of 
fiduciary management oversight. 
This summer sees the deadline for 
trustees to competitively tender 
fiduciary appointments that were 
not tendered when set up, and we 
have been engaged by many 
trustee boards to support with 
this. This in turn creates new client 
relationships that can lead to 
opportunities for us to provide  
a wider range of services.

Recent court rulings that all 
Guaranteed Minimum Pension 
(GMP) benefits in UK pension 
plans must be equalised for  
males and females has created  
a challenge for around 90% of  
all UK DB schemes. Across the 
industry, there is a large amount 
of work to be done, that will 
probably take years to complete, 
to advise on and then implement 
solutions to equalise GMPs. XPS  
is providing pragmatic solutions 
to clients to complete this 
complex work.

90%

The percentage of  
DB schemes that will  
need GMP advice  
& rectification

£340bn

Predicted AuM  
in master trusts  
by 2030

150

3

Large pension schemes  
still being administered  
in house

EPS enhancing bolt on 
deals completed by XPS  
in 2 years

9

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport10

Strategic Priorities

We are a forward-looking and ambitious 
business. Our strategy remains focused  
on achieving profitable growth.

our strategic 
priorities

Regulatory change

Expand services

Grow market share

Mergers & acquisitions

As the pensions regulatory landscape evolves over 
time, our clients need our support to make changes 
in order to comply.

We provide a full range of the services that  
pension trustees and corporate sponsors need,  
but for many clients we only provide one service  
and could do more.

We seek to grow our business by winning ‘new logo’ 

We operate in a fragmented market, and have  

clients – pension schemes and sponsors with whom 

an opportunity to grow through acquisitions  

we have no prior relationship.

that can boost our scale and capability in some 

specialist areas.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Progress

There is more regulatory change in our industry at this 
time than at perhaps any time in the last 15 years. The 
Pensions Scheme Act 2021 is now law, and it brings 
tougher Pensions Regulator powers and a strengthening 
of the funding regime for defined benefit schemes, with 
regulations on the latter expected in Q1 2022. There is 
also GMP equalisation, with schemes needing to do lots 
to correct how they have treated men and women 
unequally historically, and the CMA review deadlines for 
fiduciary reviews are in Q2 2021. Our clients need a lot of 
support to navigate through these challenges.

Priorities for 2021

Our aim in this area is not simply to increase the number 
of service lines that clients use us for, but also to 
continually innovate and develop broader solutions as  
the market evolves and requirements develop. We do  
the former by building strong trusted relationships and 
providing excellent service to clients to enable us to 
discuss wider services. We do the latter through 
developing a culture of innovation, augmented by 
strategic hires.

XPS has become a strong brand, recognised for high 

During the year we successfully integrated two small 

quality in the market with an offering that combines scale 

acquisitions made in the prior year – Trigon and Royal 

(and the ability to invest) with agility (we move quickly 

London. These have both bedded in very well, each 

and provide a very tailored approach). We use technology 

delivering a strong RoI and with happy staff and clients, 

to express our ideas and bring insight, including our 

and deliver on the Group’s strategic objectives. We now 

award winning actuarial and investment software Radar. 

have a very strong platform to do further similar deals.

New business activity remained suppressed in the year 

with the exception of Investment Consulting due to  

the pandemic.

• Key focus on supporting clients address Covid-19 
uncertainty and The Pensions Regulator guidance

• DC consulting – New Head of DC joined from AON  

to grow business

• Demand growing for GMP equalisation services
• CMA review continues to drive strong demand for FM 

oversight services

• Risk transfer – Increasing activity and pipeline
• NPT – Assets under management crossed  

£1bn threshold during the year

• Member Analytics – bring deeper insight into the 
membership characteristic of UK pension schemes

KPIs

• New business pipeline steadily growing towards 

pre-pandemic levels

• Investment Consulting business winning on 

• Market Force initiative launched to drive external 

larger clients

opportunities

• Deals completed previously continue to deliver and 

enhance shareholder value

• M&A opportunities restarting following slowdown  

during the year

GMP PROJECTS IN THE PIPELINE

MEMBER ANALYTICS MANDATES IN THE YEAR

INVESTMENT CONSULTING CLIENTS WITH ASSETS >£500M

ACQUISITIONS IN THE LAST 3 YEARS

238 

106

28

3

 
 
 
 
We aim to become 
the pre-eminent 
independent mid-tier 
pensions consulting 
firm – the best place 
for people to work, 
and the best partner 
for our clients.”

Our objective is to become the clearly 
differentiated alternative firm to the ‘Big 3’ 
and the pre-eminent mid-tier pensions 
consulting firm.

We will remain focused purely on the UK 
pensions market, operating at scale and 
yet agile enough to provide clients with 
superior service at better value than our 
larger rivals.

Regulatory change

Expand services

Grow market share

Mergers & acquisitions

As the pensions regulatory landscape evolves over 

We provide a full range of the services that  

time, our clients need our support to make changes 

pension trustees and corporate sponsors need,  

but for many clients we only provide one service  

and could do more.

We seek to grow our business by winning ‘new logo’ 
clients – pension schemes and sponsors with whom 
we have no prior relationship.

We operate in a fragmented market, and have  
an opportunity to grow through acquisitions  
that can boost our scale and capability in some 
specialist areas.

in order to comply.

Progress

There is more regulatory change in our industry at this 

time than at perhaps any time in the last 15 years. The 

Pensions Scheme Act 2021 is now law, and it brings 

Our aim in this area is not simply to increase the number 

of service lines that clients use us for, but also to 

continually innovate and develop broader solutions as  

tougher Pensions Regulator powers and a strengthening 

the market evolves and requirements develop. We do  

of the funding regime for defined benefit schemes, with 

the former by building strong trusted relationships and 

regulations on the latter expected in Q1 2022. There is 

also GMP equalisation, with schemes needing to do lots 

to correct how they have treated men and women 

providing excellent service to clients to enable us to 

discuss wider services. We do the latter through 

developing a culture of innovation, augmented by 

unequally historically, and the CMA review deadlines for 

strategic hires.

fiduciary reviews are in Q2 2021. Our clients need a lot of 

support to navigate through these challenges.

Priorities for 2021

• Key focus on supporting clients address Covid-19 

uncertainty and The Pensions Regulator guidance

• Demand growing for GMP equalisation services

• CMA review continues to drive strong demand for FM 

oversight services

• DC consulting – New Head of DC joined from AON  

to grow business

• Risk transfer – Increasing activity and pipeline

• NPT – Assets under management crossed  

£1bn threshold during the year

• Member Analytics – bring deeper insight into the 

membership characteristic of UK pension schemes

XPS has become a strong brand, recognised for high 
quality in the market with an offering that combines scale 
(and the ability to invest) with agility (we move quickly 
and provide a very tailored approach). We use technology 
to express our ideas and bring insight, including our 
award winning actuarial and investment software Radar. 
New business activity remained suppressed in the year 
with the exception of Investment Consulting due to  
the pandemic.

During the year we successfully integrated two small 
acquisitions made in the prior year – Trigon and Royal 
London. These have both bedded in very well, each 
delivering a strong RoI and with happy staff and clients, 
and deliver on the Group’s strategic objectives. We now 
have a very strong platform to do further similar deals.

• New business pipeline steadily growing towards 

pre-pandemic levels

• Investment Consulting business winning on 

larger clients

• Market Force initiative launched to drive external 

opportunities

• Deals completed previously continue to deliver and 

enhance shareholder value

• M&A opportunities restarting following slowdown  

during the year

KPIs

238 

GMP PROJECTS IN THE PIPELINE

MEMBER ANALYTICS MANDATES IN THE YEAR

INVESTMENT CONSULTING CLIENTS WITH ASSETS >£500M

ACQUISITIONS IN THE LAST 3 YEARS

106

28

3

11

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport12

Co-Chief Executives’ Review

2020/21 – an 
unprecedented 
year

April – administration business 
reengineered – crucially every 
pension payroll runs 
successfully, fully remotely

Key 
Milestones

April – XPS hold their first external 
event ‘XPS Live with The Pensions 
Regulator – David Fairs’ 

JAN

FEB

MAR

APR

MAY

JUN

JUL

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

March 2020 – Emergency Lockdown

March 2020 – Launch of weekly CEO Podcast

July – Values in Practice 
awards presented

Our year began as the pandemic was 
unfolding and the country went into 
lockdown with all the associated 
uncertainty, so it is particularly pleasing 
to report a strong revenue performance, 
demonstrating the resilience of our 
business model and strong client base. 
Key to this was re-engineering the 
business processes to deliver with 
almost everyone working from home 
and we are enormously proud of how 
our staff rose to this challenge. Our 
focus throughout has been on their 
well-being – not only making sure they 
had the right technology to do their 
job but also on supporting their morale 
and mental health.

As the year rolled on, it became even 
more important to maintain momentum 
as many staff struggled with isolation and 
home schooling so our work with the 
Mental Health Foundation, and lots of 
initiatives aimed at creating a sense of 
togetherness, were critical to ensuring 
that our teams felt well looked after and 
that they continued to look after their 
clients successfully. Now there is a change 
of mood and a sense of excitement 
building as we look forward to society 
opening up again, and for us this is 
happening against both market and 
regulatory opportunities for the business. 

To make sure we have a motivated 
and engaged workforce as we  
move into the next phase of our 
development, we are launching ‘My 
XPS My Choice’, a framework to let 
our people choose how they want to 
work going forward, whether in the 
office, at home or a hybrid. Our senior 
staff will have a responsibility to 
protect our social capital as we still 
need to engender teamwork, develop 
our junior staff and maintain our 
innovative culture, but we want to 
offer choice and flexibility, measuring 
output not input and ensuring we are 
a modern 21st century employer.

We firmly believe that our culture 
translates directly into how we perform 
as a business so it was particularly 
satisfying to win not only the Best 
Business Culture Transformation 
Initiative at the Business Culture 
Awards 2020, but to also win the 
overall Gold Award for the entire 
event. External recognition of the 
importance we place on our culture 
and values was also reflected in the 
Gold award we won in the employee 
engagement category at the 2020 UK 
Employee Experience Awards. 

A strong financial performance
Our results bear testament to the 
strength of our business. We provide 
essential services to clients and whilst 
we had to adapt to the challenges 
presented by the pandemic, we 
responded well. Total revenue  
increased 7% to £127.9 million (FY 2020:  
£119.8 million) driven by organic growth 
in all three pensions divisions along with 
the full year effect of the acquisitions of 
Royal London Corporate Pensions 
Services and Trigon Pensions.

Adjusted EBITDA increased 5% to  
£32.0 million and statutory profit before 
tax also increased 3% to £11.4 million. 
This is a pleasing outcome for the 
year, as it was delivered despite the 
challenges of Covid-19, which did 
impact on our efficiency in some areas 
of the business and also slowed some 
new business opportunities that we 
would otherwise have expected to see. 

We saw growth in both of the 
consulting businesses that together 
make up our Advisory business. In 
Pensions Actuarial and Consulting, 
revenue was up 3% on last year at £60.7 
million (FY 2020: £58.8 million), largely 
driven by new business won in 2020 
coming on stream in H1 and growing 
activity on GMP equalisation in H2. 

 
 
 
 
We were delighted with  
the industry awards won  
at the start of the year,  
and as the year went on  
with our business success, 
including where we have 
been appointed as the 
actuary to some very  
large schemes.”

Paul Cuff
Co-Chief Executive Officer 

November – Mental Health training 
for managers and allies, overall 
winner of the British Culture awards

August – Radar 
version 3 launched 
as we continued 
to invest in 
technology

AUG

SEP

OCT

NOV

DEC

JAN

FEB

October – Radar wins 
‘Actuarial Software of the 
Year’ for second year running

October – Staff Survey – 94% of staff 
agree XPS is successfully managing 
the pandemic on employees

Feb 2021 – XPS confirmed 
actuary and investment 
consultant to £2.5bn 
scheme as new business 
opportunities open up

We are extremely proud  
of how well our staff 
responded to the Covid 
crisis, and the way we  
have continued to support 
our clients and their  
scheme members highly 
effectively throughout.”

Ben Bramhall
Co-Chief Executive Officer 

13

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport14

Co-Chief Executives’ Review (continued)

In Pensions Investment and 
Consulting, strong growth reflected 
the excellent new business success we 
have been achieving for a sustained 
period of time, and also strong client 
demand for advice in volatile financial 
markets. Revenues increased by 21% 
to £11.6 million (FY 2020: £9.6 million). 
The expansion of this team is yielding 
results as we now have the scale to 
target bigger mandates, with a number 
of large mandates won in H2 that will 
help us to continue to grow in this area.

In Pensions Administration, revenue 
increased by 9% to £46.8 million  
(FY 2020: £42.9 million), underpinned 
by new contracts won prior to the 
pandemic coming on stream. 

We also saw strong growth in  
National Pensions Trust (‘NPT'), our 
defined contribution master trust. 
Assets under management grew by 
69%, to over £1.0bn, with growth 
underpinned by transfers into the 
trust and annual contributions in 
respect of active members. We are 
continuing to invest in the NPT 
proposition and have a healthy 
pipeline of opportunities.

Our SIP business saw revenues decline 
by 8%, caused by the reduction in the 
bank base rate at  
the beginning of the pandemic, and 
the decline in economic activity over 
the year. However, the underlying 
performance of the business was 
good, with strong new business 
momentum in H2, and it is well placed 
to achieve organic growth in the 
coming year.

Regulation continues to drive change
Our clients are facing multiple changes 
in pension regulation and we will 
continue to work closely with them to 
help them comply with the evolving 
environment and protect the interests 
of their members. The most significant 
area of new regulation is the Pensions 
Schemes Act 2021 which will bring in 
new funding requirements and provide 
greater safeguards for defined benefit 
schemes. These regulations will 
increase the pressure on many 
scheme-sponsors and keep pensions 
high on the corporate agenda. 

The outcome of the Competition and 
Markets (CMA) Review continues to drive 
opportunities in the area of fiduciary 
management oversight. During FY 2021 
we won 32 new appointments to 
provide independent oversight of 
fiduciary appointments. These 
appointments are pleasing in their own 

right, and also because they build new 
relationships that potentially open up 
wider opportunities for the Group. 

Another increasingly busy area is GMP 
equalisation, where recent court cases 
have given rise to the need to make 
adjustments to defined benefit 
schemes where historically men and 
women have not been treated equally. 
This is a highly technical area and we 
have developed market leading, 
pragmatic approaches that have both 
successfully delivered projects in  
FY 2021 and have generated a strong 
pipeline of work for the years ahead.

Market developments provide 
potential opportunity
There are still a number of pension 
schemes where the administration is 
provided by the sponsor through an 
‘in-house’ team. In recent years there 
has been a trend to outsource the 
administration of these schemes to a 
specialist third party provider. This has 
been a strong driver of growth for the 
Pensions Administration division 
historically.

The pandemic made it harder still for 
small in-house teams to provide 
pensions administration which could 
potentially accelerate the outsourcing 
trend of recent years as scale becomes 
more important to control costs and 
provide access to technology.

The trend to consolidation and 
mergers within the industry continues 
and as one of the largest independent 
firms in the market, we are well placed 
to benefit from these market dynamics. 

Delivering on our strategic priorities
Whilst we have seen some deferral of 
new business activity and discretionary 
projects as trustees and sponsors 
focused on dealing with the pandemic, 
we continued to make good progress 
on delivering our strategic priorities. 
Our ambition is to become the 
pre-eminent independent mid-tier 
pensions consulting firm and the XPS 
brand and footprint means we now 
offer a clearly differentiated 
alternative to the ‘Big 3‘. 

We continue to broaden our services 
both in relation to defined benefit 
schemes, where we deployed our 
member profiling techniques to help 
clients understand the potential 
impact of Covid-19 on pension 
scheme longevity, and defined 
contribution schemes where we have 
developed a variety of new services 
aimed at supporting clients with the 
changing regulatory backdrop. 

Ongoing investment in our award 
winning software, Radar, yielded 
benefits for both clients and the 
business, gaining external recognition 
once again, winning ‘Actuarial 
Software of the Year’ for the second 
year running.

With the exception of the Investment 
Consulting division where we achieved 
a strong new business performance, 
winning new clients has been slower 
during the year due to the pandemic. 
Despite this, we have still achieved 
success where opportunities have 
arisen. In Pensions Administration,  
we were delighted to win the first time 
outsourcing of a £2bn+ defined benefit 
scheme from the IT sector, and we  
will take on this role early in our new 
financial year. In early 2021, we were 
appointed as Actuarial and Investment 
advisors to a £2.5bn+ defined benefit 
scheme in the hospitality sector. The 
market is beginning to open up again 
and our pipeline is strengthening 
– these wins and our prior track record 
give us confidence that we will 
continue to gain market share during 
the year ahead.

It was a strong year for NPT, with 
69% year on year growth in assets 
to over £1bn, driven by transfers in, 
contributions and investment returns. 
This is another area of the business 
where we continue to invest in 
technology to develop a market 
leading platform for the future.

The two businesses we acquired in 
2019, Trigon and Royal London 
Corporate Pensions Services, were 
successfully bedded in during the year 
and are now fully integrated and 
delivering positive returns. Further 
growth through M&A remains a strategic 
priority. We look for transactions that 
will be a good cultural fit, easy to 
integrate, and with a strategic upside. 
A good example of this is the Kier 
Pensions Unit in 2018, which boosted 
our presence in the public sector 
administration market. This continues 
to open further opportunities for us, 
and we were delighted this year to win 
the all-Wales Police pensions 
administration contract.

People
We have assembled a strong and 
experienced management team that 
has served the business well during 
these uncertain times. We are grateful 
for their perseverance and commitment 
as the pressures of the year ebbed 
and flowed and for the resilience and 
flexibility of all our people – they 
deserve our heartfelt thanks. 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
 
In addition to Sophia Singleton  
who joined us as Head of Defined 
Contribution, a further key 
appointment during the year was  
the recruitment of our first Chief 
Information Officer, Jonathan 
Marchant, who joined us from 
Paypoint in May 2021. Jonathan will 
have a broad remit to drive all aspects 
of our technology agenda, from 
cyber-security to innovation in how 
we deliver services to clients.

This was the inaugural year for our 
Values in Practice Awards, celebrating 
people and teams who have gone above 
and beyond in the way they looked  
after each other and clients and truly 
embodied our values. One of the 
highlights of the year was reading 
through the more than 80 submissions 
nominating teams and individuals –  
it made us hugely proud to see so many 
examples of people truly rising to the 
challenges the pandemic had thrown at 
us. Presenting the awards to the winners 
was a hugely enjoyable and somewhat 
emotional moment for all involved.

Building a sustainable business
As our business grows, our ambition  
is to ensure that we do so in a 
responsible and sustainable way. We 
recognise that this is a journey and we 
are working on embedding principles 
of ESG and sustainability throughout 
XPS with a strong focus on 
collaboration and robust governance.

We have a strong societal purpose to 
help make pension schemes safe and 
secure for the members who will rely 
on them for financial security in later 
life. We continue to deploy innovative 
solutions and use of proprietary 
technology to achieve better 
outcomes for our clients and pension 
scheme members. We aim to be a 
good corporate citizen and participate 
in industry debates to shape better 
policies and more effective 
governance of our industry.

We also work very hard to protect 
and enhance the wellbeing of our 
employees, and this guides our 
decision-making. When the pandemic 
struck, our priority from the beginning 
was the safety and wellbeing of  
our colleagues, clients and other 
stakeholders. We worked hard to 
ensure we could support our clients 
whilst at the same time keeping our 
people in good spirits, well supported 
and with a strong feeling of inclusion 
and togetherness. We understood that 
everyone was facing challenges, but 
everyone’s challenges were different. 

We sent weekly voice messages to  
all staff providing a personal update 
about how things were. XPS 
produced bespoke videos on all 
aspects of working from home, on 
mindfulness, positivity, sleep and 
simple practical things to help;  
we put in place policies to support 
people. We did not furlough anyone,  
re-deploying staff where necessary. 
Colleagues who could not work 
because of Covid-19 – directly or 
indirectly because of looking after 
vulnerable dependents, or for 
childcare reasons – remained on full 
pay so they could concentrate on 
what they needed to do. 

in response to regulatory and market 
changes where clients need support. 
At the current time, the volume of 
regulatory change is high across  
a variety of areas. A new Pensions  
Bill became law in early 2021 and is 
expected to lead to changes to the 
way that schemes are funded and 
regulated. This will impact each of  
our Advisory clients, and all will need 
support in due course. There are 
numerous other regulatory changes 
that we expect will lead to continued 
strong client demand, including 
working through GMP equalisation, 
which drives activity in both our 
Advisory and Administration businesses. 

We created XPS communities around 
things we all love such as films, music, 
or exercise. To help during the depths 
of winter and lockdown 3, we even 
offered staff a 3-month Netflix 
subscription to help them through  
the dark nights at home. 

In our annual staff survey, 94% of our 
people agreed that we are a good 
company to work for and, as mentioned 
above, in November we won the 
Business Culture Award Gold Award 
for our commitment and success in 
inclusive culture and values. 

Our environmental journey continues 
– we have ambitious goals and  
are developing plans to make us 
carbon neutral in the future. The 
reengineering of the business 
processes undertaken during the past 
year has given us a more sustainable 
foundation to take this forward. 

We have established a Board 
Sustainability Committee that is 
responsible for the sustainability 
strategy and providing oversight 
of the Group’s performance against 
the sustainability framework. The 
Sustainability Committee is chaired 
by Non-Executive Director Sarah Ing 
and further details of its composition 
and activities can be found on our 
website and on page 16 to 20 of the 
Annual Report.

Outlook
The FY 2021 results demonstrate the 
resilience of our business, with a high 
proportion of our revenues being 
non-discretionary and recurring as 
they are received for essential 
services. As such, we remain well 
protected against scenarios in which 
the pandemic continues to disrupt 
economic activity. 

Another part of our strategy is to grow 
through gaining market share. After 
strong momentum at the end of FY 
2020, new logo opportunities in the 
Pensions Actuarial & Consulting and 
Pensions Administration businesses 
slowed significantly during FY 2021 as 
processes were put on hold during the 
pandemic. This will impact the new 
business contribution to growth in the 
near-term – however we are seeing 
signs of the pipeline strengthening. 
New business opportunities in 
Pensions Investment Consulting have 
remained strong throughout, driven in 
part by the CMA Review remedies 
being implemented. 

M&A is also a core part of our strategy. 
We have successfully integrated each 
of the three ‘bolt-on’ acquisitions we 
have done in recent years. We operate 
in a fragmented market, with a scalable 
platform and a strong infrastructure, 
and as such and are well placed to 
grow through further M&A.

Overall, the Group is well positioned 
to emerge from the pandemic able 
to take advantage of favourable end 
market dynamics and the busy 
regulatory backdrop for pensions. 
The Group is well placed to continue 
to deliver at least mid-single digit 
percentage organic growth in revenues 
over the medium term. The Group has 
traded in line with expectations in the 
first two months of the financial year.

Paul Cuff 
Co-chief Executive Officer
23 June 2021

Part of our strategy is to grow the 
services we provide to existing clients 

Ben Bramhall
Co-chief Executive Officer
23 June 2021

15

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport16

Sustainability

Doing the right thing is extremely important to us. We are  
committed to acting in an ethical and responsible way and have  
a strong framework centred on our values. 

strengthening  
our focus on 
responsible 
business

Our sustainability 
framework builds  
on the good work  
we have been doing 
for some time and 
crucially helps us  
focus our efforts 
where we could and 
should do more.  
In my view, taking 
responsibility for how 
we operate is very 
important, both for 
today and how we  
can have a positive 
impact in the future 
on our environment 
and broader society.”

Snehal Shah
Chief Financial Officer

As XPS Pensions Group grows, our 
ambition is to ensure that we do so in 
a responsible and sustainable way. 

We recognise that this is a journey 
and we are working on embedding 
principles of ESG and sustainability 
throughout XPS with a strong focus on 
collaboration and robust governance.

• The Group HR Director leads 
initiatives focused on our 
employees including culture, 
diversity, inclusion and employee 
engagement; and

• The Chief Operating Officer has 

responsibility for health and safety, 
the environment and charity and 
community activity.

We have established a Board 
Sustainability Committee that is 
responsible for the sustainability 
strategy and providing oversight of 
the Group’s performance against the 
sustainability framework. The 
Sustainability Committee is chaired 
by Non-Executive Director Sarah Ing 
and further details of its composition 
and activities can be found on page 
49. Operational responsibility for the 
framework sits with the Executive 
Committee and in particular:
• The Group General Counsel has 
functional responsibility for 
governance, ethics and business 
conduct;

Group support is provided to ensure 
we fulfil the requirements outlined in 
our corporate responsibility policy. 
Office heads and senior management 
take responsibility for implementing 
group policies and procedures locally.

To assist in our communication and 
focus the sustainability efforts of the 
Group, the Sustainability Committee 
has reviewed the framework  
we established for Corporate 
Responsibility last year and further 
developed our approach in light of 
evolving business and stakeholder 
requirements. Our updated 
sustainability framework is set out  
on the next page.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Focusing on 
Governance

Focusing on  
our employees

Focusing on  
our clients

Focusing on  
our communities

Focusing on  
our environment

Goal

Operate to a high 
standard of 
Corporate 
Governance

Create a 
supportive 
environment 
where employees 
can thrive

Help clients and 
scheme members 
achieve better 
outcomes

Reduce our 
impact on the 
environment and 
help others to do 
the same

Create a positive 
impact wherever 
we operate and 
for the wider 
society. Work with 
local communities 
supporting 
charities in the 
locations where 
we operate

Material 
topics

Business ethics 
and values

Employee 
engagement

Corporate 
Governance

Diversity & 
inclusion

Sustainable 
products & 
services

Responsible 
investment

Community 
engagement

Energy usage & 
climate change

Charitable giving

Environmentally 
friendly culture

Human rights & 
modern slavery

Learning & 
development

Cyber Security & 
Data Privacy

Supply chain 
management

Employee 
wellbeing

We are working on embedding our principles of responsible business through our focus on strong governance, 
collaborative partnerships and increased stakeholder engagement.

Focusing on Governance
We have in place robust governance, policies and practices to ensure we maintain the highest standards of ethical 
behaviour in all we do as well as operate to the highest standards of Corporate Governance. 

Business ethics and values
All XPS employees have access to our Business Code of Ethics, which is based on laws and values that we expect 
all our employees to adhere to in relation to areas including harassment and bullying, treating customers fairly, 
diversity and inclusion, financial crime and dealing with vulnerable customers. We have a zero-tolerance approach 
to bribery and corruption. XPS has formal anti-bribery and corruption policies, supported by a whistleblowing 
process and, where necessary, proportionate and independent investigation and follow-up of any matters reported. 

The Board has responsibility for oversight of the Group’s anti-bribery and financial crime policies and reviews their 
adequacy annually. 

Relevant employees are provided with annual training with regards to a variety of regulatory issues. These include 
training on (as appropriate) financial crime issues, bribery and corruption, insider trading, modern slavery, data 
protection, data breaches, and data security. These are delivered via online training programmes, the completion 
of which is mandatory. 

Line managers are responsible for ensuring compliance with our policies and they are supported by both the 
Group’s Compliance team and the HR team.

Human rights and modern slavery
We aspire to conduct business in a way that values and respects the human rights of all our stakeholders.  
We comply with all relevant legislation, including the UK Modern Slavery Act.

Corporate Governance
Please refer to pages 34 to 72 for our report on Corporate Governance.

17

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
 
 
18

Sustainability (continued)

Focusing on our Employees
We strongly believe that our 
employees are key to the success of 
the business and as such we aim to 
create a supportive environment 
where our people can thrive. We want 
to make sure our employees feel 
engaged, empowered and satisfied in 
their work and we are committed to 
creating a healthy workplace with 
opportunities for future development.

Diversity and inclusion 
We believe that a diverse and 
inclusive culture is important to the 
success of our business. Having 
people from a wide variety of 
backgrounds, and with a range of 
experiences and skills, will help us 
better understand and meet the 
needs of clients, making our business 
stronger and driving continued 
growth and innovation.

Employee Engagement
With the pandemic in 2020, 
communication with our employees 
increased and this was using a range 
of channels including intranet, 
podcasts and video. We wanted to 
make sure staff were informed and 
did not feel isolated. 

Our Employee Engagement Group, 
which was created in 2019, has helped 
grow the business through more 
employee collaboration and input on 
key decisions. 

Our 2020 Engagement Survey 
attracted an 80% response rate (2019: 
87%). The engagement results were 
shared openly across the business 
and Business Heads worked with their 
teams to discuss the results and 
together create and implement action 
plans to address feedback. 

During the year, we gave colleagues 
the opportunity to submit their 
diversity data on a voluntary and 
anonymous basis and this data was 
entered into our new HR system. This 
will enable us to analyse, report and 
understand our workforce 
composition, forming the basis of 
targeted initiatives to drive diversity 
and inclusion and measure change. 

We are also partnering with an 
external diversity consultancy to 
progress the development of our 
diversity and inclusion strategy.

XPS’s gender diversity at the year-
end is shown below. The Group has a 
good gender balance overall and we 
continue to work to increase the 
number of women in senior positions. 

80%

of our employees 
completed the survey 

94%

of staff agreed XPS  
is a good company  
to work for 

86%

of staff believe XPS is 
inclusive, and values 
each person for what 
they bring to the 
Company

Gender split data

Group total: 1,380

Partners total: 73

2021

698

2020
639

2021

682

17

2020
12

630

Board total: 7

Other employees total: 1,300

2021

2

2020
2

 Female 

 Male

2021

679

2020
625

5

5

Disability

4.6%

of colleagues disclose that they 
have a disability.

Multi-generational 
split

13%

3%

1%

 <20

 21-30 

 31-40

 41-50

 51-60

 60+

22%

35%

26%

56

59

621

566

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Focusing on our Clients
We help clients through innovative 
services and use of proprietary 
technology to achieve better outcomes 
for clients and scheme members.

A central part of our staff training 
is the ever-growing threat of 
cyber-attacks and the logistical, 
reputational, and financial 
damage this can cause.

Because our employees are our first 
line of defence in protecting client, 
employee and corporate information, 
we have regular communication for 
staff awareness. This policy applies to 
all staff and contractors, all of whom 
receive compulsory training.

Focusing on our Communities
We help communities by working 
with charities supporting the 
disadvantaged and championing 
those causes where we can make  
a difference.

Community engagement
Giving back to society and our local 
communities is important to us, and 
we encourage employee involvement 
in fundraising and volunteering. 

Charitable giving
We have continued our partnership 
with the Mental Health Foundation 
and Tax Help for Older People. Our 
employees have fundraised for local 
charities. In total, over £37,000 was 
given to charities.

Supply chain management
We aim to encourage and work 
with suppliers to achieve the highest 
standards within our supply chain. We 
are committed to working with our 
supply base to ensure that together 
we can achieve wider social, economic 
and environmental benefits.

Sustainable products and services
We have a wide reach of clients, and 
for some of the scheme members 
where we provide administration 
services, some may be vulnerable. 
Our Scam Service has been created 
to protect the needs of pensioners 
and to create better outcomes  
for clients. Another example of 
sustainable development is providing 
information in an accessible format 
for scheme members who are  
visually impaired. 

We are proud to be a signatory of the 
United Nations-supported Principles 
for Responsible Investment (PRI). 
We have committed to uphold the 
six principles of the PRI and be 
held accountable. Further information 
is available on our website.

We work with our clients to 
incorporate their specific 
requirements on responsible and 
sustainable investing. XPS believes 
that taking a sustainable approach 
will be of growing importance for 
many of our clients and to assist them 
we are awarding funds a ‘sustainable’ 
designation where the fund 
demonstrates the right combination 
of attributes. Our vision is to offer 
clients an independently vetted 
sustainable choice across all 
asset classes. 

Cybersecurity and Data privacy
We embed information security 
within our culture. We do this by 
implementing effective policies and 
technical controls to safeguard our 
customers’ information. We also 
focus on data privacy and being 
transparent about how and where  
we are using client data. Data is one 
of our most valuable assets and we 
must ensure that the information 
we hold is accurate, secure and 
managed appropriately. 

Whilst we continued to have a gender 
pay gap in 2020, we are delighted to 
report a reduction in that gap from 
2019. Reducing the gender pay gap 
continues to provide the opportunity 
to encourage the diversity of our 
teams and remains an important 
corporate objective both for now and 
the future. Further detail can be found 
on our website.

Learning and development
We continue to work with employees 
offering professional training, 
mentoring and workshops designed to 
accelerate the progress of colleagues. 

During the year we delivered nearly 
17,000 hours of training across a 
wide range of professional and 
technical courses. 

We offered a broad range of 
development opportunities for all 
employees covering personal and 
team development through a range 
of delivery methods including  
a mentoring scheme, Actuarial 
Mentoring Programme (known as 
‘AMP’), designed to improve diversity 
within the actuarial profession and 
the 30% Club mentoring scheme 
for staff from across the business. 
We continued to provide support for 
employees studying for professional 
qualifications, and a range of bespoke 
technical programmes exist across all 
areas of our business. 

Employee wellbeing
We provide a comprehensive 
formal and informal support 
structure for employees which 
includes private medical insurance, 
permanent health insurance, critical 
illness and life cover for all employees. 

We also provide an employee 
assistance programme, access to  
a second medical opinion referral 
service and counselling. 

We continue to partner with the 
Mental Health Foundation and Mental 
Health at Work in sharing information 
and promoting good mental health. 
All line managers have received 
mental health training in the last year 
and we have also launched a Mental 
Health Allies programme with over 
60 trained allies. We have signed up 
to the BITC Mental Health Work 
Commitment as we believe in a 
healthy, supportive working culture, 
where everyone is comfortable raising 
issues and problems. 

19

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport20

Sustainability (continued)

Focusing on our Environment 
The Group is committed to the 
protection of the environment, not 
just from its direct activities on site 
but through our use of sustainable 
resources, carbon management 
related to business travel and 
preventing pollution through reducing 
and eliminating sources of pollution. 
The Group seeks to influence all 
parties in the life cycle of its services, 
and create an environmentally friendly 
ethos amongst its staff, contractors 
and suppliers.

Energy usage
The Group continues to review its 
activities and operations in order to 
identify and evaluate environmental 
aspects and impacts. Initially this  
has concentrated on the area where 
we believe we can have the largest 
impact: energy usage, but is also 
considering other important aspects 
such as travel, waste products and 
water consumption. This work has 
been supported by our Environmental 
Management System (‘EMS’) that is 
due to be certified to ISO 14001 by  
the end of 2021. Specific initiatives 
include the increased usage of video 

conferencing  
facilities for both  
internal and client  
meetings to reduce  
the amount of staff and  
client travel, and options  
to reduce the amount of  
printed materials required.

These initiatives are supported  
by the Group’s Sustainability 
Committee, with the Head of  
Risk responsible for their delivery.

Annual greenhouse gas emissions  
and energy use data for the period 
1 April 2020 to 31 March 2021:

Fiscal year 2020–2021

Total scope 1 emissions (tCO2e)
Total scope 2 emissions (tCO2e)
Total scope 1 + scope 2 emissions (tCO2e)
Energy consumption used to calculate above emissions (kWh)
Revenue (£m)
Scope 1 + scope 2 emissions intensity (tCO2e/£m)
Total scope 3 emissions (tCO2e)
Total scope 1+ scope 2+ scope 3 emissions (tCO2e)
Energy consumption used to calculate above emissions (kWh)
Scope 1 + scope 2 + scope 3 emissions intensity (tCO2e/£m)

Current reporting 
year 2020–2021

Comparison reporting 
year 2019–2020

267.4
547.7
815.0
3,329,067
119.8
6.81

212.0
350.3
562.3
2,655,443
127.9
4.40
1,928
2,490
12,720,256
19.47

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

tCO2e = Tonnes of CO2 equivalent.

Notes:
1 
2  All activities are UK-based.
3  Conversion to carbon rates used current Department for Education, Food and Rural Affairs (‘DEFRA’) factors.
4  Calculations were carried out by Pilio Ltd, using a methodology in line with ISAE 3410.
5  Scope 3 emission figures include business travel, employee commuting and domestic energy usage to support staff working from home during the Covid-19 pandemic 

in response to government guidance.

  Like for like comparisons between scope 1 and 2 emissions against the previous reporting period show a reduction in emissions data across the Group’s offices. 
This reflects the fact a majority of staff worked from home in response to government Covid-19 guidance so the energy consumed in these offices was lower.

  The increase in domestic emissions due to staff working from home has been calculated and included in scope 3 emissions data for the 2020-2021 period. This results  
in an overall increase in emissions since the previous year, although like for like comparisons are not applicable as this is the first year scope 3 data has been included. 

Emission figures for 2020-2021 are 
higher than the comparison reporting 
year for a number of factors. These 
include increased numbers of staff, 
additional scope 2 data being 
available for inclusion and the 
introduction of supply chain scope  
3 data for the first time this year. 
These figures also take into account 
the increased numbers of staff 
working from home during the  
period due to the Covid-19  
pandemic and the associated 
additional domestic emissions.

Task Force on  
Climate-related Financial 
Disclosures (TCFD) Reporting
Work is underway to ensure that the 
Group fully complies with the new 
TCFD requirements by the time we 
report on the financial year ending 
31 March 2022.

An initial gap analysis has been 
completed, with an action plan to 
compliance agreed.

Environmentally friendly culture
In 2020 we were in the process of 
creating a more environmentally 
focused workspace, with green 
champions promoting an 
environmentally alert culture. With 
lockdown coming to an end we  
intend to roll out a number of green 
initiatives in the coming year. This is 
assisted by the adoption of a hybrid 
working model involving less travel. 
This will also allow us to reduce our 
overall paper consumption alongside 
the planned reduction in core printed 
stationery and letterheads. We will 
also be increasing our collaboration 
with new and existing suppliers to  
the use of sustainable products and 
energy sources.

Key focus areas for 2021
• Create a more responsible business 

focused culture at XPS.

• Focus on inclusion in everything 
we do including to attract, retain 
and develop colleagues, and 
how we engage others.

• Share our expertise for the benefit of 
pension scheme trustees, members 
and sponsoring employers.

• Reduce the environmental impact 
of our operations with the aim to 
present options to the Board by the 
end of 2021, on becoming net zero.

• Continue to support local and 

national charities through donations 
and supporting our colleagues in 
their fundraising activities.

 
 
 
 
Non-Financial Information Statement

Reporting requirement

Policies and standards  
which govern our approach

Information necessary to understand our business  
and its impact, policy due diligence and outcomes

Environmental matters

Environmental policy1

Helping the transition to a sustainable  
low-carbon economy, see page 20

Employees

Recruitment and Selection Policy

Reflecting the needs of our stakeholders: 

Colleagues, see pages 18-19 & 29 
Diversity, see pages 18, 38 & 45

Diversity and Inclusion

Flexible Working Policy1

Harassment and Bullying 
Prevention Policy1

Grievance Policy1

Health and Safety Policy1

Agile Working Guidelines Policy1

Family Friendly Policy1

Sabbatical Policy1

Parental Bereavement Leave Policy

Time off (excluding Annual Leave) Policy

Menopause Policy

Respect for human rights

Data Privacy Policy

Modern Slavery 

Information and Cyber Security Policy1

Reflecting the needs of our stakeholders: 
Suppliers, see pages 17 & 19

Social matters

CSR Policy1

Vulnerable Customer Policy1

Bribery and Gifts Policy1

Whistleblowing Policy1

Financial Crime Policy1

Anti-corruption and  
anti-bribery

Description of principal risks and 
impact of business activity

Description of our  
business model

Non-financial key  
performance indicators

Reflecting the needs of our stakeholders:  
Clients, see pages 19 & 29

Reflecting the needs of our stakeholders:  
Clients, see page 28

Reflecting the needs of our stakeholders: 
Colleagues, see pages 17 & 29

Helping the transition to a sustainable  
low-carbon economy: Risk management,  
see page 20

Risk overview 2020 themes, see pages 30 & 31

Our principal risks, see pages 32 & 33

Our business model, see pages 4 & 5

Operating responsibly for our stakeholders,  
see page 18

1   Certain Group policies and internal standards and guidelines are not published externally.
2  The policies mentioned above form part of the Group’s Policy Framework which is founded on key risk management principles. The policies which  

underpin the principles define mandatory requirements for risk management. Robust processes and controls to identify and report policy outcomes  
are in place and were followed in 2020.

21

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport22

Our response to Covid-19

When the pandemic struck, our priority from the 
beginning was the safety and well-being of our staff. 
With 928,000 members under administration, we 
also needed to ensure continuity of service to our 
clients and the pension schemes we support.

maintain  
and support

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Supporting our staff
Our aim was to support our clients 
whilst at the same time keeping our 
people engaged and well supported. 
Our CEOs sent a weekly voice 
message to all of our staff, that was 
both an update from around the 
Company but also a really personal 
and honest message about how 
things were in a wider sense that 
people valued for its authenticity.

We created bespoke videos on all 
aspects of working from home, 
including mindfulness, positivity, 
sleep, and these videos contained 
practical things to help. These were 
well received and subsequently 
distributed more widely to clients,  
our suppliers and wider contacts. We 
created XPS communities – covering 
things we all love, like films, music, 
exercise and more. With the return  
of lockdown in the depths of winter, 

we gave all of our staff a three-month 
Netflix subscription to help them 
through the dark nights at home.

As a strong, profitable business, 
we did not furlough anyone and put 
policies in place to support staff who 
could not work as a result of Covid-19, 
either directly or because they were 
looking after vulnerable dependents, 
or for childcare reasons. They also 
remained on full pay. We did not take 
up any Government support on offer 
other than the automatic deferral  
of VAT payment at the start of the 
pandemic which was applied to all 
companies in the UK.

Maintaining customer service
We worked quickly to transition to a 
remote working model that would 
fully support our clients and maintain 
our high levels of customer service. 
This entailed some re-engineering of 
our processes, particularly in our 

Pensions Administration business 
which was primarily an office-based 
environment. The changes that this 
required were implemented smoothly 
and effectively, ensuring we continued 
to pay pensions every month, without 
any disruption.

Living/reinforcing our values
This was the inaugural year for our 
Values in Practice Programme, 
celebrating people and teams who 
have gone above and beyond in the 
way they looked after each other and 
clients and truly embodied our values. 
It seemed particularly important to 
mark this during this year when our 
people had risen to the challenges 
that the pandemic had thrown at us. 
There were more than 80 submissions 
nominating teams and individuals and 
the presentation of the awards was 
actually a somewhat emotional 
moment for all involved.

 
 
 
 
A note of thanks to you and 
the business for my VIP award. 
I was overcome by a wave of 
emotion (all positive) when I 
opened the delivery box 
containing my award. It’s an 
honour and I feel privileged  
to work for a company that 
doesn’t just go through  
the motions. XPS actively 
implements the values it 
promotes and this is reflected 
throughout the Company  
and workplace.”

Thank you for this morning’s 
Office Tour I found it very 
interesting. I just want to say 
Thank You; I have only been  
a part of the XPS family since 
December. I have been 
extremely impressed with  
how XPS has managed this 
crisis. Compared to my 
previous employers you  
made me feel welcome and  
I 100% believe in everything 
that XPS stands for.”

A member of our IT team in Reading

A member of our administration team in Middlesbrough

External recognition of the 
importance we placed on our culture 
and values was also reflected in the 
Gold award we won in the employee 
engagement category at the 2020 UK 
Employee Experience Awards. We 
also won not only the Best Business 
Culture Transformation Initiative at the 
Business Culture awards 2020, but 
also the overall Gold Award for the 
entire event.

Summary
We are very proud of the evidence 
that all of this worked. In our annual 
staff survey, 94% of our people  
agreed that we are a good company 
to work for and we produced a strong 
financial performance in a year of 
unprecedented change.

23

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport24

Financial Review

It was another strong  
year of growth for the  
business as Group revenues 
grew 7% year on year with 
6% organic growth year  
on year. Adjusted EBITDA 
grew 5% year on year 
translating into a 17% 
increase in adjusted 
operating cash-flow. 
Statutory profit before tax 
grew 3% year on year.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

another  
strong year  
of growth

The business adapted well to  
remote working in response to the 
Covid-19 pandemic and the financial 
results are a testament to the hard 
work and dedication of all our 
colleagues as they continued to  
serve clients well and looked after 
each other. During what has been an 
incredibly challenging year for all,  
we are proud to have stood by our 
colleagues and continued to serve  
all our stakeholders. We did not 
furlough any staff or make any 
pandemic related redundancies and 
neither did we take up any other 
financial help on offer from 
Government, other than the automatic 
deferral of the VAT payment at the 
start of the pandemic which applied 
to all companies in the UK.

Significant accounting matters
Adjusted numbers
We continue to show ‘adjusted’ 
numbers in our results to better 
reflect the underlying business 
performance. The ‘adjusted’ numbers 
exclude exceptional and non-trading 
items such as the amortisation of 
acquired intangible assets as well as 
share-based payment costs. The 
exceptional and non-trading items  
are disclosed in the notes to the 
financial statements. This alternative 
performance measure may not  
be similar to those defined by  
other entities but help to  
explain the progress within  
the underlying business.

 
 
 
 
Group income statement

Revenue
Pensions Actuarial & Consulting
Pensions Investment Consulting

Total Advisory
Pensions Administration
SIP
NPT

Total Revenue

Adj. EBITDA1
Depreciation & Amortisation

Adj. EBIT1
Exceptional & non-trading items
Net finance expense

Profit before tax
Income tax expense

Profit after tax

FY 2021
£m

FY 2020
£m

Change
%

60.7
11.6

72.3
46.8
5.6
3.2

58.8
9.6

68.4
42.9
6.1
2.4

127.9

119.8

32.0
(4.9)

27.1
(13.9)
(1.8)

11.4
(2.4)

9.0

30.4
(4.2)

26.2
(12.8)
(2.3)

11.1
(3.7)

7.4

3%
21%

6%
9%
(8%)
35%

7%

5%
(17%)

3%
(9%)
22%

3%
34%

22%

1  Adjusted measures exclude the impact of exceptional and non-trading items: acquisition related amortisation, share based payments, corporate transaction costs, 

restructuring costs and other items considered exceptional by virtue of nature, size and incidence.

Revenue
Total Group revenues grew 7% year on 
year with all divisions apart from SIP 
achieving year on year growth. 

expected recovery in asset prices, as 
well as additional asset transfers; total 
assets under management are now 
over £1.0 billion.

Pensions Actuarial and Consulting is 
the Group’s largest business. Despite 
the challenges of working from home 
as well as a lack of new business 
pitches in the first half of the year 
owing to the pandemic, the division 
achieved 3% year on year growth  
in revenues.

Pensions Investment Consulting had 
another strong year with a number  
of new client mandates as well as 
continued growth in FM oversight 
appointments following the CMA 
ruling in 2019. Revenues in this division 
grew 21% year on year.

Pensions Administration revenues 
grew 9% year on year with a number 
of new client wins coming on  
stream during the year. Pensions 
Administration accounted for 37% of 
the Group revenues (FY 2020: 36%).

SIP revenues were down 8% on prior 
year, primarily due to the reduction in 
the bank base rate. The National 
Pensions Trust (‘NPT’) business has 
performed well with revenue growing 
35% year on year; with a faster-than-

Operating costs
Total operating costs (excluding 
exceptional and non-trading items) for 
the Group grew by 8% or £7.4 million 
year on year. The main drivers for  
the cost increases are an increase in 
headcount as the business grows 
(1,325 FTE v 1,203 last year), continued 
investment in IT (particularly cyber 
security), higher bonus cost in light of 
the strong financial performance and 
the full year impact of the two bolt-on 
acquisitions in FY 2020. This was 
partially offset by lower travel and 
entertainment costs.

As a result, the Group’s adjusted 
EBITDA grew by 5% year on year. 
Adjusted EBITDA margin was 25%; 
(FY 2020: 25%). Statutory profit 
before tax grew by 3% year on year. 

Exceptional and non-trading items
Exceptional and non-trading items in 
the year totalled £13.9 million (FY 2020: 
£12.8 million). Amortisation of acquired 
intangible assets amounted to  
£6.6 million (FY 2020: £7.1 million). 
Share based payment charges were 
£4.9 million (FY 2020: £2.2 million) 

driven mainly by a higher expectation 
of vesting compared to the prior year. 
Exceptional costs arising as a result  
of the Covid-19 pandemic were  
£2.0 million (FY 2020: £0.3 million). 
£1.0 million of this was spent on 
providing IT equipment such as 
laptops, monitors etc. to all our staff, 
some of whom were entirely office 
based prior to the pandemic. The 
other £1.0 million is a non-cash charge 
for significantly higher than normal 
holiday pay accrual as the holiday 
cycle was disrupted by the pandemic 
and a higher than normal level of 
holiday was carried forward at the  
end of the holiday year in December 
2020. The holiday pay accrual will 
unwind during FY 2022 and the 
resulting benefit will also be shown 
within exceptional items as a credit in  
FY 2022. Restructuring costs of  
£0.4 million (FY 2020: £1.9 million) 
were incurred on the integration of 
bolt on acquisitions completed in the 
prior year. The Group also incurred 
corporate transaction costs of  
£0.2 million (FY 2020: £0.9 million)  
in the year. This was partially offset  
by an exceptional credit of £0.4m  
in respect of the contingent 
consideration no longer payable for 
the Trigon acquisition. 

25

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport26

Financial Review (continued)

Tax credit on the exceptional and 
non-trading items was £2.3 million 
(FY 2020: £0.1 million).

See notes to the financial statements 
for further information on the items 
detailed above.

Net finance costs
Net finance costs for the year were 
£2.0 million (FY 2020: £2.4 million). 
The decrease reflected the lower net 
debt in the year, and the reduction in 
the bank base rate. 

Taxation
A tax charge of £4.7 million (FY 2020: 
£3.8 million) was recognised on 
adjusted profits (before exceptional 
and non-trading items) which 
represents an effective tax rate of 19% 
(FY 2020: 16%). The Group also 
recognised a tax credit of £2.3 million 
(FY 2020: £0.1 million) on exceptional 
and non-trading items, which resulted 
in an overall tax charge for the year of 
£2.4 million (FY 2020: £3.7 million). 

The tax credit on exceptional and 
non-trading items was only £0.1m in 
FY 2020 due to an increase in the 
enacted tax rate from 17% to 19% and 
the related revaluation of deferred tax 
liabilities on the Group’s intangible 
assets. The increase in corporation tax 
expected in FY 2024 to 25% will drive 
an increase in tax charges in FY 2022, 
once the rate has been enacted as the 
deferred tax liabilities are revalued at 
the higher rate.

Our businesses generate considerable 
tax revenue for the Government in the 
UK. For the year ended 31 March 2021, 
we paid corporation tax of £3.3 million 
(FY 2020: £3.5 million); we collected 
employment taxes of £22.8 million 
(FY 2020: £19.7 million) and VAT of 
£20.2 million (FY 2020: £16.5 million). 
Additionally, we have paid £1.2 million 
(FY 2020: £1.1 million) in business 
rates. The total tax contribution of  
the Group was therefore £47.5 million 
(FY 2020: £40.8 million). 

EPS 
The Basic EPS for FY 2021 is 4.4p  
(FY 2020: 3.6p). The year on year 
increase is mainly due to the higher 
profits as well as a higher tax credit of 
£2.3m on exceptional and non-trading 
items in FY 2021. 

Adjusted fully diluted EPS of 9.8p was 
delivered in FY 2021 (FY 2020: 9.6p), 
an increase of 2% year on year. 

Dividend
A final dividend of 4.4p is being 
proposed by the Board (FY 2020: 
4.3p). The final dividend, if approved, 
which amounts to £9.0m (FY 2020: 
£8.8m), will be paid on 23 September 
2021 to those shareholders on the 
register on 27 August 2021.

Cash flow, capital expenditure and financing

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Non-GAAP cash-flow

Operating
Adjusted EBITDA
Change in net working capital
Other

Adjusted operating cash-flow

OCF conversion
Financing & tax
Net finance expense
Taxes paid
(Repayment of) / Proceeds from new loans
Repayment of lease liabilities
Share related movements

Net cash-flow after financing

Investing
Acquisition (net of disposals)
Capex
Restricted cash (NPT)

Net cash-flow after investing

Dividends paid
Exceptional items

Movement in cash

Net debt
Leverage

31 March  

2021
£m

31 March 
2020
£m

32.0
4.9
(0.7)

36.2

113%

(2.1)
(3.3)
(11.5)
(2.6)
(3.4)

13.3

(0.2)
(2.9)
(0.5)

9.7

(13.4)
(2.1)

(5.8)

50.4
1.74x

30.4
0.6
(0.1)

30.9

102%

(1.8)
(3.5)
13.3
(2.0)
0.3

37.2

(7.1)
(3.4)
(0.3)

26.4

(13.4)
(4.1)

8.9

56.1
1.98x

 
 
 
 
FY 2021 has been another year of 
strong cash performance for the 
Group. Adjusted operating cash flow 
increased by £5.3 million driven by a 
£1.6 million increase in EBITDA and  
a £4.3 million improvement in net 
working capital. Other items were an 
outflow of £0.7 million compared to  
an outflow of £0.1 million in FY 2020. 
Overall, this resulted in adjusted 
operating cash flow conversion of 113% 
compared to 102% in the prior year.

Taxes paid in the year were £0.9 million 
higher than the income statement 
charge due to the current year tax 
credit in relation to exceptional items in 
the year which is largely a deferred tax.

During the year, the Group repaid 
£11.5 million of the RCF. Capital 
expenditure in the year amounted to 
£2.9 million (FY 2020: £3.4 million) 
with £0.7 million spent on leasehold 
improvements and office fit-outs  
and the remaining £2.2 million on IT 
equipment and software enhancements.

After paying £13.4 million in dividends 
and £2.1 million of exceptional costs, 
the Group cash balance decreased by 
£5.8 million year on year to close at 
£8.6 million. The Group had drawn 
down £59 million of its £80 million 
RCF at 31 March 2021, resulting in a 
net debt of £50.4 million, a decrease 
of £5.7 million year on year. 

The existing revolving credit facility 
(RCF) of £80 million matures in 
December 2022. In June 2020 an 
additional £10 million was agreed with 
the lending banks in order to provide 
the Group with greater financial 
flexibility to navigate the potential 
challenges posed by the Covid-19 
crisis. This additional facility was not 
required and was exited in March 2021.

Going concern
Details on the Directors continuing  
to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the Financial Statements 
can be found in the Viability 
Statement in the Strategic Report in 
the Annual Report. The Directors have 
confirmed that, after due consideration, 
they have a reasonable expectation 
that the Company and the Group  
have adequate resources to continue 
in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. For this reason, 
they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the 
financial statements.

Subsidiary undertakings
The subsidiary undertakings of the 
Group in the year are listed in note 34 
in the Annual Report.

Snehal Shah
Chief Financial Officer
23 June 2021

27

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport28

Section 172 Statement

engaging with 
stakeholders

Directors of the Company act in good faith to promote the long term success of 
the Company for the benefit benefit of its members as a whole, taking into 
account the factors as listed in section 172 of the Companies Act 2006. 

The directors are fully aware of their responsibilities to promote the success of the Company in accordance with  
section 172 of the Companies Act 2006. The Company’s engagement strategy and how feedback from stakeholders 
influences the Board agenda and decision-making is set out within the below table. The Board give careful 
consideration to balancing the views of all stakeholder groups.

You can read about the Group’s principal risks and key mitigations, including those in relation to clients, employees 
and suppliers, on pages 30 to 33.

Clients

Board / Company engagement strategy
•  The Company engages with clients through a client 
satisfaction survey, completed every two years, of 
which the Board reviews the results. The Board 
receives a monthly management report on newly 
won clients and clients at risk.

• During the year, the Company was unable to hold 
its usual Annual Client Conference and drinks 
reception due to the Covid-19 pandemic. The 
Company hosted 13 live client webcast events which 
were attended by Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors. The Company saw an uptake in client 
participation in comparison to the prior year. 
• The Company and the Directors participate 

in industry and client forums.

• The Company prides itself on its excellent client 

care programme and continues to provide clients 
with training seminars and publications.

Shareholders

Board / Company engagement strategy
• The Board engages with Company shareholders 
in many ways. Engagement methods include 
meetings with investors and results roadshows 
hosted by the Executive Directors, regular calls 
with investors and analysts through the Company’s 
brokers and proxy advisers and at the Company’s 
Annual General Meeting.

• Sarah Ing is appointed as the designated 

Shareholder Engagement Non-Executive Director. 
Sarah attends the Company’s results presentations 
to analysts and shareholders. Sarah meets or 
speaks to shareholders and prospective investors as 
well as sell side analysts.

Regulators

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

How feedback influences the Board agenda and decision-making
Client impact is at the centre of the business and Board 
decisions give significant consideration to this.

Throughout the Covid-19 pandemic, the Company’s 
engagement with and delivery for clients has been of 
paramount importance to both the Board and Company.  
Client feedback has been shared with the Board regularly 
throughout the pandemic. 

How feedback influences the Board agenda and decision-making
During the AGM, roadshows and meetings, the Board 
members will listen and respond to views and will give 
feedback to the business as necessary.

The Board receives updates on investor perception through 
the Executive Directors and the Company’s brokers, this 
influences decision-making at Board level.

During the year, the Remuneration Committee conducted a 
consultation on the 2021 Directors’ Remuneration Policy, 
feedback resulted in the current policy remaining in place for 
another year.

Following feedback from shareholders, the Board formed a 
Sustainability Committee during the year. You can read the 
Committee report on page 49.

Board / Company engagement strategy
• The Company works with the regulators 
by responding to requests, consultations, 
submitting returns as required and attending 
industry meetings.

How feedback influences the Board agenda and decision-making
Margaret Snowdon, OBE is an advisor to the Pensions Regulator 
and regularly updates the Board on industry developments.

Discussion with regulators influences the Company’s 
regulatory strategy and approach and business planning. 

 
 
 
 
How feedback influences the Board agenda and decision-making
Employees have been at the forefront of the Company and 
Board’s discussions and considerations throughout the year, 
especially in relation to the Covid-19 pandemic. Following 
consultation with employees and the Employee Engagement 
Group, the Company has announced ‘My XPS, My Choice’; the 
trial of a new working model, empowering employees to make 
the choice of where they work going forwards. You can read 
more about this on the Company’s website xpsgroup.com. 

The employee survey is used to identify and drive changes 
across the Group and adapt, improve and evolve Company 
culture. This year the survey results have led focus on:
• Clearer guidance and transparency around performance 

reviews, the internal promotions process and remuneration;

• Improved communication between departments;
• Resourcing and work/life balance; and
• Employee connection to the XPS brand and culture. 
A firm-wide plan was presented to the Board, and local action 
plans are in place as a result of the survey.

The Employee Engagement Group was consulted during the 
review of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy.

How feedback influences the Board agenda and decision-making
The Company is committed to sourcing products ethically and 
sustainably, and establishing long-term, open and fair 
relationships with its suppliers.

How feedback influences the Board agenda and decision-making
The Sustainability Committee was created in the year and  
is working through understanding the interests of various 
stakeholders and developing the Group’s approach to 
sustainability. The Committee is working to identify the key 
issues requiring greater focus and improvement.

The Board receives updates from the Sustainability Committee 
on a regular basis. 

During the year, all Board members attended an externally 
facilitated training session on The Growing Importance  
of ESG. 

Employees/Contractors

Board / Company engagement strategy
• Margaret Snowdon, OBE is appointed as the 

designated Employee Engagement Non-Executive 
Director. Margaret is Chair of the Employee 
Engagement Group (‘EEG’), attends the Diversity, 
Equality and Inclusion Group (‘DEIG’) and speaks at 
Partners’ meetings. The Board receives updates 
after each EEG and DEIG meeting.

• Employees complete an annual employee survey, 
the results of which are analysed in detail, shared 
with the Board and an action plan agreed. 

• An external and anonymous whistleblowing hotline 
is available to employees 24/7. Any reports can be 
escalated to the Board as required.

Suppliers

Board / Company engagement strategy
• The Company has a designated procurement team 
and an external company who engage with and 
carry out due diligence on its suppliers.

• An annual review of existing suppliers, who provide 
services that are deemed as higher risk (i.e. process 
large amounts of our data or have access to our 
offices), is completed in addition to quarterly 
performance reviews with key suppliers.

• The Board annually approves the XPS Modern 

Slavery Statement. 

• Our supplier Code of Conduct communicates what 

we expect from our suppliers.

Communities, Charities and Environment*

Board / Company engagement strategy
• This year the Company and Board enhanced their 
consideration of the Company’s Sustainability and 
ESG matters by forming a Sustainability Committee, 
chaired by Sarah Ing (Non-Executive Director). The 
Committee report can be found within the 
Governance Report on page 49.

• XPS has a community support strategy 

involving employees and local offices fundraise 
for local charities.

• XPS remains partnered with the Mental Health 

Foundation, voted for by employees as the charity 
of choice annually since 2019.

• The Company annually reviews energy and 

greenhouse gas impacts on the environment; and 
energy-saving opportunities and the resulting 
ability to reduce greenhouse gas emissions.

• An annual Energy Savings Opportunities Scheme 

(‘ESOS’) verification report is completed.

• The XPS Investment business provides an offering 
to clients advising on ESG matters and making 
sustainable investments.

*  Read more about the Company’s engagement and commitment on page 20 and the Company website xpsgroup.com.

29

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport30

Risk Management

principal risks 
and uncertainties

The Group recognises the need to take risk to help  
its customers achieve their objectives and achieve 
commercial success – seeking to take risk where it  
has the skills to exploit that risk and can manage  
it within risk tolerance. It seeks to avoid risk where  
it sees it as unrewarded or it cannot be well managed 
or understood. 

Over the last year our risk management 
frameworks have been fundamental to 
enabling us to react effectively to the 
Covid-19 pandemic. The controls in 
place allowed us to support the pivot 
to higher numbers of staff working 
from home, whilst maintaining the 
protections in place to continue to 
serve our clients in a robust manner. 
These controls were reviewed 
throughout the year and have been 
enhanced to address the changes in 
the external threat environment such 
as the worldwide increase in phishing 
and ransomware attacks. Whilst parts 
of our supply chain were impacted we 
had sufficient resilience designed and 
in place to ensure we maintained our 
high levels of service to our clients 
and the members we support, whilst 
at the same time protecting our staff.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

In addition to this we have continued to 
develop our overall risk management 
capabilities to improve our ability to 
detect, understand and manage our 
risks. Significant developments since 
the last report include:
• The appointment of a Head of 

Assurance who is responsible for 
co-ordinating the assurance 
activities within the Group (AAF, 
ISO etc.) and ensuring opportunities 
to enhance controls are effectively 
implemented.

• The re-appointment of PwC to 

support the internal audit 
programme, as agreed with the 
Audit and Risk Committee.

• The introduction of a new Third 

Party Assurance framework, which 
tiers suppliers and uses risk-based 
questionnaires to validate the 
appropriate controls frameworks 
are in place.

• The embedding of the Executive 

level Risk Management Committee 
to monitor existing risks, discuss 
new risks and agree prioritisation of 
mitigation activities.

• The expansion of the dedicated 
Information Security team,  
including the introduction of several 
additional technical security 
enhancements. 

• The development of the 

Environmental Management System 
to manage our impact on the 
environment and support SECR 
and TCFD reporting.

The Group continues to operate 
a three lines of defence model 
which supports the promotion of 
effective risk management and 
seeks to prevent risk taking that 
exceed the Group’s appetite.

The Board, with the support of 
the Audit & Risk Committee, have 
identified the principal risks that 
could materially impact the Group’s 
ability to achieve its objectives 
and deliver its strategy.

These include general business 
risks that are faced by the Group 
and are comparable to those that 
would be faced by similar businesses 
operating in the pensions sector.

 
 
 
 
These general business risks include:
• Political/ Economic/ Social – Risks 
created by the political, economic/ 
financial and social environment  
in which we operate, e.g. war, 
demographic trends, pandemics, 
Government influence on business, 
currency changes, market volatility, 
interest rates, liquidity.

• Competition – Risks of change on 
demand side of business due to 
changes in customer demands or 
competitors, likely to influence 
entire industry e.g. aggressive 
competitor pricing, consolidation 

trends, major technological 
innovation, substitute technologies. 
These changes may not directly 
affect the Group but could influence 
the entire industry.

• Legal and Regulatory – Risks 

associated with the criminal and civil 
judicial processes and contract law 
e.g. not identifying changes 
required by new legislation, 
increased litigation in a particular 
field, environmental impacts, 
industrial accidents.

Board of Directors / Audit & Risk Committee

Senior Management / Risk Management Committee

Operational 
Management  
1st Line

Risk  
Management  
2nd Line

Internal 
Audit  
3rd Line

s
e
i
t
i
v
i
t
c
A
y
e
K

s
e
m
o
c
t
u
O

• Implement governance, 

risk and control 
frameworks

• Measure and manage 
project performance
• Manage risk (within 
agreed risk appetite)

• Design governance, risk 
and control framework

• Monitor adherence 

to framework
• Provide timely, 

balanced information

• Review framework 

application objectively

• Offer independent 
oversight of 1st and 
2nd Lines

Control of Risks

Confirmation of  
Control Effectiveness

Strategic Overview 
of Controls

31

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
32

Risk Management (continued)

The material risks and uncertainties which are either unique to the Group or apply to the pensions industry  
in which we operate are detailed below. They are not set out in any priority order,nor do they include all those  
associated with the Group.

Specific risks that are material to XPS Group are:

PRINCIPAL RISK

DESCRIPTION

KEY MITIGATIONS

Strategy

Strategic 
Planning and 
Execution

Financial 
performance

Errors

Risks linked to the assumptions of 
future development and size of 
pensions market used to develop 
the strategy or business model or 
business portfolio, e.g. poor data, 
group think, lack of diversity 
of opinions.

The Board approves and regularly reviews the Group’s strategy in conjunction with 
budgets, targeting long term increases in shareholder value and ensuring robust 
independent challenge.
Key decisions are assessed against risk appetites for key Group risks with a Risk 
Management framework in place to identify and escalate where strategic decisions  
may have unintended impacts.

Risks linked to assessing, 
evaluating, planning and executing 
the strategy, e.g. poor budgeting 
and planning, inadequate or 
misleading communications, poor 
management of change or projects.

The Board regularly reviews the Group’s strategy, supported by the Executive with 
responsibilities assigned for the delivery of initiatives and provision of regular progress 
updates.
Specific project management resources are used to deliver large scale change 
initiatives, allowing risks to delivery of initiatives to be clearly identified at planning 
stage along with mitigations.

Risks relating to the failure to 
monitor and appropriately manage 
the financial performance of the 
Group on an ongoing basis which 
could lead to poor management 
decisions, higher costs and/or 
inaccurate external financial 
reporting.

Risks relating to material mistakes 
made by staff, including the 
non-compliance with established 
procedures, e.g. failure to calculate 
benefits correctly, not following 
peer review processes.

The Group has a highly qualified and experienced financial reporting team. There is an 
extensive financial controls framework in place and key controls are regularly reviewed 
by internal and external audits. The Group undertakes detailed bottom-up budgeting 
and reforecasting exercises with the final budget and reforecast approved by the Board. 
Management information is published on a regular basis and the Executive Committee 
reviews the financial performance of the Group at least monthly. The Board receives and 
scrutinises financial performance of the Group at each Board meeting.

The Group recruitment process ensures only high calibre staff are recruited who are 
then supported by training programmes. Staff use standardised documented processes 
and checklists for key processes. 
Higher risk work is identified with peer review and additional signoff required, with 
regular quality audits to confirm processes are being followed correctly. 
Insurance arrangements are in place to limit the loss should an error occur, with root 
cause analysis used to identify where controls can be improved.

Theft and Fraud 
(Financial, 
Physical Assets)

Risks relating to the safeguarding of 
Group and Client financial and 
physical assets from malicious 
actors e.g. stealing physical assets, 
deliberate misrepresentation 
leading to fraud, theft from Group 
or Client bank accounts.

The Group deploys robust physical and systems access controls, along with enforcing 
segregation of duties to preventing individuals from making fraudulent payments or 
transfers. 
These controls are supported with staff vetting, training and awareness and are 
regularly independently audited.
Insurance arrangements are in place to protect against larger claims.

Information/ 
Cyber Security

Risks relating to the confidentiality, 
integrity and availability of 
information assets including IT 
systems, e.g. Unauthorised access 
or disclosure of staff or client 
information, denial of access to 
systems or data required, business 
continuity incidents caused by 
equipment breakdown/ fire/ flood.

The Group has an Information Security Management System (ISMS) in place to ensure 
that risks are identified and managed effectively. This includes a range of technical 
controls, a dedicated Information Security Team, and a 24/ 7 Security Operations 
Centre. These are supported by regular independent audits and penetration tests. 
All staff are provided with comprehensive policies and guidance, with awareness of key 
topics reinforced with regular training initiatives, e.g. Phishing Awareness.
The Group has a range of Business Continuity capabilities in place to minimise impact of 
incidents impacting the Group’s data, facilities or systems. These include documented 
plans which are tested regularly.

Staff/ Human 
Resources

Risks relating to our people, 
e.g. compensation, retention, 
succession planning, 
skills and competence, 
management capability.

The Group’s recruitment strategy is to seek professional, experienced and qualified staff 
utilising robust staff recruitment and selection processes. This is supported by 
comprehensive training, development and performance management processes, with 
longer term incentives in place to aid retention.
Regular key staff reviews ensure succession planning is kept up to date and remains 
appropriate. 
Staffing requirements are considered as part of strategy and budgeting process to 
ensure alignment with business plans.

Third Party 
Supplier/ 
Outsourcing

Client 
Engagement

Business 
Conduct and 
Reputation

Risks relating to the use of third 
parties to support our operations, 
e.g. poor due diligence and 
selection processes, failure of a 
supplier to follow agreed upon 
procedures, financial failure of 
supplier resulting in inability to 
deliver service.

The Group has a formal selection process that ensures due diligence is carried out, 
which is proportionate to the risk of the potential failure of the third party. 
The approvals and signing framework also ensure contracts include key risks relating to 
services provided and risks identified are managed and accepted prior to agreements 
being signed. This is supported by ongoing monitoring of key third parties, including 
SLA’s and financial status. 
Where there is a reliance on a single supplier, contingency plans are in place to protect 
against failure.

Risks relating to the provision of 
poor service or advice to clients, 
e.g. advice that is not clear, not 
understood by the client, poorly 
presented or using out of date 
technologies, but not errors.

Risks that could lead to a breach of 
acceptable conduct or ethics and/
or impact the Group’s brand, image 
or reputation, failure to ensure 
services are appropriate for client’s 
needs, discrimination, poor 
response to a Cyber Incident or 
client complaint.

The Group client engagement process ensures that expectations are matched to Group 
capabilities. Regular ongoing dialogue with clients ensures that the services provided 
meet their requirements and continue to be appropriate to their specific needs.
Client surveys are used to gather feedback and identify trends and insights.

The Group’s Mission, Vision and Values clearly set out the tone from the top, highlighting 
to all staff the conduct and ethics that are expected from them at all times. This is 
supported by a recruitment strategy that seeks professional, experienced and qualified 
staff who fit with Groups values.
Due diligence of third parties considers supply chain risks, ensuring that only suppliers 
that comply with their legal obligations are selected.
The Group has an Incident Management processes in place to ensure that it is able to 
effectively respond to significant events that could impact its brand or reputation, 
which is regularly tested.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Covid-19 (Coronavirus) 
The outbreak of the Covid-19 virus 
significantly altered normal business 
operating conditions during 2020. 
The Group adapted its operations 
in order to keep staff safe and was 
able to continue client servicing 
without interruption. Our existing 
business continuity plans and 
technology infrastructure ensured a 
resilient response to the pandemic 
was possible. All staff have been 
subject to home working periods 
and throughout have maintained 
our client service and other 
obligations. The Executive Covid-19 
Crisis Team was convened at the 
outset of the pandemic to oversee 
key decisions and continues to 
meet on a regular basis to agree 
and co-ordinate the mitigating 
actions required. Assessment of 
the potential impacts of Covid-19 
on the Group principal risks has 
been regularly completed, with 
oversight from the Risk Management 
Committee and input from the Audit 
and Risk Committee. Although 
the external conditions created 
significant challenges, our strong 

control environment and prompt 
management actions have resulted 
in resilient and stable residual risk 
positions across the organisation’s 
risk profile. There is still uncertainty 
with regard to the medium- and 
long-term consequences of Covid-19, 
particularly with regard to the 
potential implications for markets and 
economies. The Group continues to 
review the external environment and 
monitor any potential horizon risks.

consider that the Annual Report, 
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced 
and understandable and provides 
the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the 
Group’s position, performance, 
business model and strategy. 

This Strategic Report has been 
approved by the Board and signed 
by order of the Board: 

The Directors confirm that they have 
carried out a robust assessment 
of the principal risks facing the 
Group, including those that would 
threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity. 
The principal risks are those listed 
above. The Directors do not 
believe there to be any additional 
emerging risks that are not already 
addressed within the principal 
risks and uncertainties section.

The Directors confirm in the 
Directors’ Responsibility Statement 
in the annual report that they 

Paul Cuff 
Co-chief Executive Officer
23 June 2021

Ben Bramhall
Co-chief Executive Officer
23 June 2021

Viability Statement
The Group’s business activities, 
together with the factors likely 
to affect its future development, 
performance and position are 
set out in the reports referred to 
in the Overview section on page 
73 of this Directors’ Report.

The Directors have assessed the 
long-term prospects of the Group 
based upon business plans and upon 
cash flow projections for the three-
year period ending 31 March 2024. 
The three-year period was chosen 
as it is considered the longest time 
frame over which any reasonable 
view can be formed. The forecasts 
and cash flow projections being 
used to assess going concern have 
been comprehensively stress-tested 
by using simulation techniques 
involving sensitivity analysis.

In forming their opinion, the Directors 
have performed a robust assessment 
of the principal risks and uncertainties 
facing the Group as set out on pages 
30 to 33. In addition, Note 2 on 
page 97 of the accounts includes 
the Group’s objectives, policies 
and processes for managing its 
capital; its financial risk management 
objectives and its exposure to credit 

risk, liquidity risk and market risk. 
The Group had £9 million of cash 
at 31 March 2021 and a £80 million 
committed financing facility until 
December 2022. Further details of 
the financial position of the Group,  
its cash flows, liquidity position and 
borrowing facilities are described 
within the Financial Statements  
and notes.

As a part of the scenario modelling 
outlined above, the Directors have 
considered the ongoing impact 
of the Covid-19 pandemic on the 
liquidity of the Group and the Group’s 
banking covenants. An additional 
facility, which was negotiated in June 
2020 was not required and so the 
Group exited it early in March 2021.

The Group has a strong balance 
sheet, access to financial resources 
and long-term growth prospects.  
As a consequence, the Directors 
believe that the Group is 
well placed to manage its 
business risks successfully.

Even in the worst case scenarios 
considered plausible by the 
Directors, the cost reduction 
actions available to the Group, the 

reduction of non-essential capital 
expenditure and management of 
working capital are expected to be 
effective and sufficient to ensure the 
continued viability of the Group.

After making enquiries, the Directors 
have formed a judgement, at the 
time of approving the Financial 
Statements, that there is a reasonable 
expectation that the Group has 
adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence and meet its 
liabilities as they fall due over the 
three-year assessment period. For 
this reason, the Directors continue 
to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the financial statements. 
At the same time, the Directors also 
considered the appropriateness 
of adopting the going concern 
basis of accounting in preparing 
the financial statements and the 
Directors’ identification of any 
material uncertainties to the Group 
and the Parent Company’s ability to 
continue to do so over a period of 
at least 12 months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements.

33

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
34

Chairman’s Governance Report

robust corporate 
governance is vital 
and provides a 
sustainable platform 
for success and 
growth of the Group

I am immensely 
proud of the way 
XPS employees have 
united, during a 
challenging year, to 
support each other 
and our clients.”

Tom Cross Brown
Chairman 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Covid-19 pandemic
I am pleased to report that the Board 
operated smoothly and effectively 
throughout the year, despite not being 
able to meet physically due to the 
global Covid-19 pandemic. The Board 
met virtually on a regular basis to 
discuss the pandemic’s impact on the 
Group and its stakeholders. The Board 
had particular regard to the views of 
and potential impact on the Group’s 
stakeholders throughout. I am proud 
to say that XPS employees have 
worked exceptionally well in 
unprecedented times, supporting 
each other and our clients.

Sustainability Committee
During the year, a Sustainability 
Committee of the Board was formed. 
The Committee supports the  
Board in discharging its oversight 
responsibilities of the Company’s 
ESG impact and initiatives. The 
Sustainability Committee is chaired 
by Sarah Ing (Independent Non-
Executive Director) and made up of 
five other members including Margaret 
Snowdon, OBE (Independent 
Non- Executive Director) and Snehal 
Shah (Chief Financial Officer). 
The Committee met three times 
during the year, to establish its 
purpose and key areas of focus. 

The Committee will consider 
measurable targets in relation to 
the Company’s ESG initiatives and 
impact and looks forward to reporting 
on this next year. You can read the 
Sustainability Committee report on 
page 49 of the Governance Report.

Board effectiveness improvements
In 2020, we conducted our first 
external Board evaluation. We have 
since worked to make improvements 
as detailed on page 43 of the 
Governance Report. This year,  
the Board carried out an internal 
evaluation of its effectiveness during 
the year, the process and findings 
can be found on page 43.

In the report that follows, we have 
included a description of how the 
Company has applied the main 
principles of the 2018 Corporate 
Governance Code (the ‘Code’), and 
complied with all its relevant provisions, 
throughout the financial year.

Tom Cross Brown
Chairman
23 June 2021

 
 
 
 
The Board is committed to 
maintaining high standards 
of corporate governance and 
sustainability, in the interest 
of all of XPS’ stakeholders.”

Statement of compliance with the  
UK Corporate Governance Code

In 2020, the Company has applied the Principles and complied 
with the Provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 
as they apply to it as a ‘smaller company’ (defined in the Code as 
being a company below the FTSE 350). The Code is publicly 
available at www.frc.org.uk.

Further information on how the Company has applied the five 
overarching categories of Principles can be found on the 
following pages –

(i)  Board Leadership and Company Purpose: pages 36 to 38, 

(ii)  Division of Responsibilities: pages 40 to 41, 

(iii)  Composition, Succession and Evaluation: pages 39 and  

42 to 45,

(iv) Audit, Risk and Internal Control: pages 46 to 48, 

(v)  Remuneration: pages 50 to 72.

35

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport36

Board of Directors

The Board is composed of seven members, consisting of the Chairman, 
three Executive Directors and three independent Non-Executive Directors.

Tom Cross Brown
Independent  
Non-Executive Chairman

Paul Cuff
Co-Chief Executive 
Officer

Ben Bramhall
Co-Chief Executive 
Officer

Snehal Shah
Chief Financial Officer

Margaret Snowdon OBE

Alan Bannatyne

Independent  

Non-Executive Director

Senior Independent  

Non-Executive Director

Sarah Ing

Independent  

Non-Executive Director

Board attendance

12/12

11/121

11/121

Committee membership/Committee attendance

12/12

 3/3

12/12

11/121

12/12

 4/4

 8/8 

 2/2

 3/3

 4/4

 8/8 

 2/2

 4/4

 8/8 

 2/2

 3/3

 8/8 
 2/2

Appointed

January 2017

Strengths and experience

Key strengths: 
•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

strategy, financial 
reporting, listed company 
experience, investor 
relations and corporate 
governance are noted as 
Tom’s key skills

Key experience:
•  CEO of ABN AMRO Asset 

Manager until 2003

•  21 years at Lazard 

Brothers & Co. until 1997, 
CEO 1994 – 1997

•  Non-Executive Chairman 
of Pearl Assurance plc 
2005 – 2009

•  Non-Executive Chairman 
of Just Retirement Group 
2006 – 2016

•  Non-Executive Director 
of Artemis Alpha Trust 
plc 2006 – 2018 

•  Non-Executive member 

of Management 
Committee Artemis 
Investment Management 
LLP 2006 – 2018

Current external listed 
company directorships / 
key appointments:
•  None

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

October 2016

April 2014

July 2019

January 2017

January 2017

May 2019

Key strengths:
•  Qualified actuary with 

20+ years of experience 
in the pensions industry
•  Responsible for raising 
the profile of XPS in the 
market, generating new 
business and the Group 
strategy with regard to 
M&A opportunities and 
technology investment
•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

strategy, pensions 
industry and investor 
relations are noted as 
Paul’s key skills 

Key experience:
•  Partner at KPMG  

2008 – 2016

•  Head of KPMG London 
pensions team prior to 
joining XPS

Current external listed 
company directorships / 
key appointments:
•  None

Key strengths:
•  Qualified actuary with 

20+ years of experience 
in the pensions industry
•  Responsible for day-to-
day operation of the 
business, including 
provision of services to 
existing clients, revenue 
generation and the 
Group’s people strategy
•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

strategy, pensions 
industry, risk 
management, workforce 
engagement, investor 
relations, business 
development and 
operational management 
are noted as Ben’s 
key skills

Key experience:
•  Eight years at KPMG 

Current external listed 
company directorships / 
key appointments:
•  None

Key strengths:
•  Chartered accountant 

with 20+ years 
of experience 

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 
post deal integration, 
strategy, risk 
management, financial 
reporting, listed company 
experience, investor 
relations, corporate 
governance and 
operational management 
are noted as Snehal’s 
key skills

Key experience:
•  Ten years with PwC
•  Senior finance roles 

including Group Financial 
Controller, Head of 
Investor Relations and 
Finance Director for 
Integration at Ladbrokes 
plc 2009 – 2017

•  Interim Director (Finance 
& Corporate Governance) 
at Parkdean Resorts Ltd 
and Interim Director of 
Finance & Investor 
Relations at Countrywide 
plc 2017 – 2019

Current external listed 
company directorships / 
key appointments:
•  None

Key strengths:

Key strengths:

Key strengths:

•  40+ years of experience 

•  Chartered accountant

•  Chartered accountant

•  Recent and relevant 

financial experience 

•  Strategy, risk 

management, financial 

reporting, listed company 

experience, investor 

relations and corporate 

governance are noted as 

Alan’s key skills

Key experience:

•  Qualified with Deloitte 

& Touche

•  Previous Commercial 

Manager of Primecom 

and Financial Director 

of Foresight – both 

subsidiaries of Primedia

•  Group Financial 

Controller of Robert 

Walters plc 2002 – 2007

Current external listed 

company directorships / 

key appointments:

•  Chief Financial Officer 

of Robert Walters plc 

since March 2007

•  30+ years of experience 

in financial services 

including audit, corporate 

finance, investment 

banking and asset 

management

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

financial reporting, 

investor relations and risk 

management are noted 

as Sarah’s key skills

Key experience:

•  Previously a top-rated 

equity research analyst 

covering the UK general 

financial services sector 

and also founded and ran 

a hedge fund investment 

management business 

Current external listed 

company directorships / 

key appointments:

•  Non-Executive Director 

of CMC Markets plc since 

September 2017, where 

she chairs the 

Remuneration Committee

•  Director of Liontrust ESG 

Trust plc

in Pensions industry

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

strategy, risk management, 

workforce engagement, 

pensions industry, 

corporate governance, 

business development and 

operational management 

are noted as Margaret’s 

key skills

Key experience:

•  Partner and Director 

level positions with 

leading employee 

benefit consultancies

•  Previous Non-Executive 

Director of The Pensions 

Regulator

•  Appointed an OBE in 

2010 and received many 

awards for her contribution 

to pensions

Current external listed 

company directorships / 

key appointments:

•  Non-Executive member 

of Phoenix Group With 

Profits Committee

•  Advisory Board Member 

of Moneyhub Financial 

Technology Limited

•  Trustee of The Pension 

SuperFund

•  Chair of Pension Scams 

Industry Group

•  Non-Executive Director of 

the Pensions Policy Institute

•  Non Executive Member of 

the ReAssure Group With 

Profits Fairness Committee

1  Directors were absent at an ad hoc Board meeting due to a prior engagement, they were briefed ahead of the meeting.

 
 
 
 
Tom Cross Brown

Paul Cuff

Ben Bramhall

Snehal Shah

Independent  

Co-Chief Executive 

Co-Chief Executive 

Chief Financial Officer

Non-Executive Chairman

Officer

Officer

Margaret Snowdon OBE
Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Alan Bannatyne
Senior Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Sarah Ing
Independent  
Non-Executive Director

Committee membership/Committee attendance

11/121

11/121

12/12

11/121

12/12

October 2016

April 2014

July 2019

January 2017

January 2017

May 2019

 4/4
 8/8 
 2/2
 3/3

 4/4
 8/8 
 2/2

 4/4
 8/8 
 2/2
 3/3

Key strengths:
•  Chartered accountant
•  Recent and relevant 
financial experience 

•  Strategy, risk 

management, financial 
reporting, listed company 
experience, investor 
relations and corporate 
governance are noted as 
Alan’s key skills

Key experience:
•  Qualified with Deloitte 

& Touche

•  Previous Commercial 
Manager of Primecom 
and Financial Director 
of Foresight – both 
subsidiaries of Primedia

•  Group Financial 

Controller of Robert 
Walters plc 2002 – 2007

Current external listed 
company directorships / 
key appointments:
•  Chief Financial Officer 
of Robert Walters plc 
since March 2007

Key strengths:
•  Chartered accountant
•  30+ years of experience 

in financial services 
including audit, corporate 
finance, investment 
banking and asset 
management

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 
financial reporting, 
investor relations and risk 
management are noted 
as Sarah’s key skills

Key experience:
•  Previously a top-rated 
equity research analyst 
covering the UK general 
financial services sector 
and also founded and ran 
a hedge fund investment 
management business 

Current external listed 
company directorships / 
key appointments:
•  Non-Executive Director 

of CMC Markets plc since 
September 2017, where 
she chairs the 
Remuneration Committee
•  Director of Liontrust ESG 

Trust plc

Key strengths:
•  40+ years of experience 

in Pensions industry
•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

strategy, risk management, 
workforce engagement, 
pensions industry, 
corporate governance, 
business development and 
operational management 
are noted as Margaret’s 
key skills

Key experience:
•  Partner and Director 
level positions with 
leading employee 
benefit consultancies
•  Previous Non-Executive 
Director of The Pensions 
Regulator

•  Appointed an OBE in 

2010 and received many 
awards for her contribution 
to pensions

Current external listed 
company directorships / 
key appointments:
•  Non-Executive member 
of Phoenix Group With 
Profits Committee

•  Advisory Board Member 
of Moneyhub Financial 
Technology Limited
•  Trustee of The Pension 

SuperFund

•  Chair of Pension Scams 

Industry Group

•  Non-Executive Director of 
the Pensions Policy Institute
•  Non Executive Member of 
the ReAssure Group With 
Profits Fairness Committee

Board attendance

12/12

 8/8 

 2/2

Appointed

January 2017

Strengths and experience

strategy, financial 

reporting, listed company 

experience, investor 

relations and corporate 

governance are noted as 

Tom’s key skills

Key experience:

•  CEO of ABN AMRO Asset 

Manager until 2003

•  21 years at Lazard 

Brothers & Co. until 1997, 

CEO 1994 – 1997

•  Non-Executive Chairman 

of Pearl Assurance plc 

2005 – 2009

•  Non-Executive Chairman 

of Just Retirement Group 

2006 – 2016

•  Non-Executive Director 

of Artemis Alpha Trust 

plc 2006 – 2018 

•  Non-Executive member 

of Management 

Committee Artemis 

Investment Management 

LLP 2006 – 2018

Current external listed 

company directorships / 

key appointments:

•  None

Key strengths: 

Key strengths:

Key strengths:

Key strengths:

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

•  Qualified actuary with 

•  Qualified actuary with 

•  Chartered accountant 

20+ years of experience 

in the pensions industry

20+ years of experience 

in the pensions industry

with 20+ years 

of experience 

•  Responsible for raising 

•  Responsible for day-to-

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

the profile of XPS in the 

market, generating new 

business and the Group 

strategy with regard to 

M&A opportunities and 

technology investment

strategy, pensions 

industry and investor 

relations are noted as 

Paul’s key skills 

Key experience:

•  Partner at KPMG  

2008 – 2016

•  Head of KPMG London 

pensions team prior to 

joining XPS

Current external listed 

company directorships / 

key appointments:

•  None

day operation of the 

business, including 

provision of services to 

existing clients, revenue 

generation and the 

Group’s people strategy

strategy, pensions 

industry, risk 

management, workforce 

engagement, investor 

relations, business 

development and 

are noted as Ben’s 

key skills

Key experience:

•  Eight years at KPMG 

Current external listed 

company directorships / 

key appointments:

•  None

operational management 

•  Senior finance roles 

12/12

 3/3

•  Mergers & acquisitions, 

post deal integration, 

strategy, risk 

management, financial 

reporting, listed company 

experience, investor 

relations, corporate 

governance and 

operational management 

are noted as Snehal’s 

key skills

Key experience:

•  Ten years with PwC

including Group Financial 

Controller, Head of 

Investor Relations and 

Finance Director for 

Integration at Ladbrokes 

plc 2009 – 2017

•  Interim Director (Finance 

& Corporate Governance) 

at Parkdean Resorts Ltd 

and Interim Director of 

Finance & Investor 

Relations at Countrywide 

plc 2017 – 2019

Current external listed 

company directorships / 

key appointments:

•  None

1  Directors were absent at an ad hoc Board meeting due to a prior engagement, they were briefed ahead of the meeting.

Key to 
Committee 
Membership

Audit & Risk

 Committee Member 
 Committee Chair

Remuneration

 Committee Member 
 Committee Chair

Nomination

 Committee Member 
 Committee Chair

Sustainability

 Committee Member 
 Committee Chair

37

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport38

Group Governance at a Glance

we believe that a commitment  
to diversity, equality and inclusion 
is key to sustainable success

Board Composition

43%

29%

29%

Independence
 Non-Executives
 Executives

Age

 41-50
 51-60 
 61+

Gender
 Male
 Female

71%

50%

50%

Non-Executive 
gender
 Male
 Female

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Non-Executive 
tenure

 >3 years
 <3 years

57%

25%

75%

Ethnicity
 White
  Minority 
ethnic group

Director skills and experience

Board members with core / secondary skill

Environmental and social sustainability

Operational management

Business development

Corporate Governance

Marketing

Investor relations

Pensions industry

Prior FTSE experience

Workforce engagement

Financial reporting

Risk management

Mergers and acquisitions

14%

57%

14%

86%

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

7

7

5

4

 
 
 
 
The role of the Nomination Committee 
is to undertake an annual review  
of succession planning and ensure 
that the membership, composition 
and diversity of the Board and its 
Committees, including the balance 
of skills, remain appropriate. The 
Committee also reviews the outcome 
of the annual Board effectiveness 
review to determine any changes 
required. Further details are given in 
the Nomination Committee report on 
pages 44 to 45.

The role of the Sustainability 
Committee is to support the Board’s 
oversight responsibilities of the 
Company’s environmental, social and 
governance impact and initiatives. 
Further details are given in the 
Sustainability Committee report on 
page 49.

Executive Committee
The Co-Chief Executive Officers 
operate a Group Executive Committee 
to support them in the performance 
of their duties, including the 
development and implementation 
of strategy and the day-to-day 
operational management of the 
business. During the year the 
Committee was comprised of the 
Executive Directors, the Chief 
Operating Officer, Head of Advisory, 
Managing Director of Administration, 
Head of Investment, General Counsel 
and HR Director. The Company has 
since appointed a Chief Information 
Officer who has joined the Executive 
Committee. Further details of the 
Executive Committee, including 
biographical details for each member, 
can be found on the Company’s 
website: https://www.xpsgroup.com/
investors/corporate-governance/
other-committees/

Board composition and 
independence 
The Board is composed of seven 
members, consisting of the Chairman, 
three Executive Directors and three 
independent Non-Executive Directors.
The Company complies with the 
provisions of the Code for smaller 
companies below the FTSE 350 which 
requires the composition of the Board 
of Directors of a UK listed company  
to include at least two independent 
Non-Executive Directors (excluding 
the Chairman). The Board concluded 
that Tom Cross Brown met the 
independence criteria set out in  
the Code on his appointment  
as Chairman. 

The Board considers that Non-
Executive Directors Alan Bannatyne, 
Margaret Snowdon, OBE and  
Sarah Ing are each independent of 
management in character, judgement 
and opinion and are free from 
relationships or circumstances that 
could affect their judgement. One  
of the Non-Executive Directors,  
Alan Bannatyne, acts as the Senior 
Independent Director. All Directors 
continue to devote sufficient time  
to their roles.

The Board benefits from the wide 
experience of its Non-Executive 
Directors. Biographical details of all 
Board members are given on pages 
36 to 37.

Board Committees
The Board operates in accordance 
with the Company’s Articles of 
Association and has an Audit and  
Risk Committee, a Remuneration 
Committee, a Nomination Committee 
and a Sustainability Committee with 
formally delegated duties, authorities 
and reporting responsibilities, to assist 
it with the direction and control of the 
Group. From time to time, separate 
Committees may be set up by the 
Board to consider specific issues 
when the need arises. Written terms 
of reference for each Committee are 
subject to annual review and periodic 
updating to reflect any changes  
in legislation, regulation or best 
practice. The terms of reference for 
the four main Board Committees are 
available on the Company’s website at 
https://www.xpsgroup.com/investors/
corporate-governance/board-
committees/. 

The Company complies with the Code 
provision that a UK listed company’s 
Remuneration and Audit Committees 
should comprise at least three 
independent Non-Executive Directors 
and that the Nomination Committee 
should comprise a majority of 
independent Directors. Tom Cross 
Brown chairs the Nomination 
Committee, Alan Bannatyne chairs  
the Audit and Risk Committee, 
Margaret Snowdon, OBE chairs  
the Remuneration Committee and  
Sarah Ing chairs the Sustainability 
Committee. The Company Chairman  
is not a member of the Audit and  
Risk Committee, in compliance with 
the Code. Each Chair reports on the 
business of their previous Committee 
meeting at the next scheduled  
Board meeting. 

The Audit and Risk Committee’s role  
is to assist the Board in discharging its 
oversight responsibilities by reviewing 
and monitoring the following: the 
integrity of the financial information 
provided to shareholders; the 
effectiveness of the Company’s 
system of internal controls and risk 
management; the external audit 
process and auditors; and the 
processes for compliance with laws, 
regulations and ethical codes of 
practice. Further details are given in 
the Audit and Risk Committee report 
on pages 46 to 48.

The role of the Remuneration 
Committee is to assist the Board 
to fulfil its responsibility to 
shareholders to ensure that 
remuneration policy and practices 
of the Company reward fairly and 
responsibly, with a clear link to 
corporate and individual performance, 
having regard to statutory and 
regulatory requirements. The 
Committee recommends the policy 
the Board should adopt on executive 
remuneration and, within the terms 
of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
approved by shareholders at the 
AGM in September 2020, determines 
and agrees with the Board the levels 
of remuneration for each of the 
Executive Directors, the Company 
Chairman and designated senior 
management below Board level. 
Further details are given in the 
Remuneration Report on pages  
50 to 72.

39

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport40

Board Responsibilities

Board responsibilities 
The Board is focused on providing 
entrepreneurial leadership to the Group. It is 
responsible for directing and controlling the 
Group and has overall authority for the effective 
and prudent management and conduct of the 
Group’s business and the Group’s strategy and 
development. The Board monitors performance, 
and is responsible for ensuring that appropriate 
financial and human resources are in place for 
the Group to meet its objectives, and takes the 
lead in setting and embedding the Group’s 
culture, values and standards. The Board is also 
responsible for ensuring the maintenance of  
a sound system of internal control and risk 
management (including financial, operational 
and compliance controls, and for reviewing the 
overall effectiveness of systems in place), and 
for the approval of any changes to the capital, 
corporate or management structure of the 
Group. There is a formal schedule of matters 
reserved for Board approval which is subject to 
annual review and published on the Company’s 
website: www.xpsgroup.com.

The matters reserved for the Board include:
• The Group’s long-term objectives, business 

strategy and risk appetite;

• The Company’s policies, values and standards;
• Annual business plans, budgets and forecasts;
• Extension of the Group’s activities into new 

business or geographic areas;

• Changes in capital structure and any form of 

fundraising or asset securitisation;

• Major changes to the corporate structure, 

including material acquisitions and disposals;
• Interim and annual financial statements and 

dividend policy;

• Material guarantees, indemnities and letters  

of comfort;

• The Group’s system of internal control and  

risk management;

• Contracts which are material strategically or 

by reason of size or duration;

• Calling of shareholder meetings and related 

documentation;

• Changes to the membership of the Board and 

its Committees;

• Remuneration policy for the Directors and 

senior executives;

• Introduction of new share incentive plans or 

major changes to existing plans; and

• The Company’s overall corporate governance 

arrangements.

There is a clear division of key responsibilities 
between the Chairman and the Co-CEOs. 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Board division of responsibilities 

Tom Cross Brown 
Chairman
• Leads the Board and manages the effective 
leadership and governance of the Board
• Provides direction and focus on business 
strategy, performance, value creation 
and accountability

• Ensures the Board establishes a strategy that 
facilitates the entrepreneurial development  
of the Group and promotes the long-term 
sustainable success of the Group’s approach
• Ensures clear structure for effective operation 

of the Board and its Committees

• Sets Board agenda and ensures sufficient time 
is allocated to promote effective debate to 
support sound decision-making

• Ensures the Board receives precise, timely and 

clear information

• Encourages Directors to contribute fully to 

Board discussions, ensuring sufficient 
challenge of major proposals

• Meets with the Non-Executive Directors 
independently of the Executive Directors

• Leads the process for evaluating the 

performance and development needs of the 
Board, its Committees and individual Directors
• Leads the Board succession planning process 

and chairs the Nomination Committee

• Acts as a sounding board for the Co-CEOs  

on important business issues

• Ensures the Board sets the risk appetite  
it is willing to take in the implementation  
of strategy

• Ensures effective communication with 
shareholders to ensure that the Board 
understands their views on governance and 
performance against the strategy

• Ensures effective communication with other 

key stakeholders

 
 
 
 
Alan Bannatyne
Senior Independent  
Non-Executive Director
• Acts as a sounding board for the  
Chairman and other Directors
• Leads the annual review of the 

Chairman’s performance

• Leads the Non-Executive Directors  

meetings without the Chairman present
• Acts as an additional point of contact for 
shareholders, if they have concerns that 
contact through the normal channels  
have failed to resolve or for which 
such contact is inappropriate

• Chairman of the Audit and  

Risk Committee

Co-Chief Executive Officers
• The Co-CEOs have worked together for over 20 years, 
having both started their careers as trainee actuaries at 
Punter Southall, before spending many years in the same 
team at KPMG

• Their long friendship and history of working together, 
and their complementary skill sets, make the Co-CEO 
arrangement a success

• The Co-CEOs report to the Chairman and the Board and 
are responsible for jointly leading the Group’s business 
and managing it in accordance with the business plan 
approved by the Board, the Board’s overall risk appetite, 
the Group policies approved by the Board and its 
delegated authorities, and all applicable laws 
and regulations

• The Co-CEOs recommend budgets and forecasts for 

Board approval, lead the investor relations programme 
and maintain a dialogue with the Chairman on significant 
business developments and strategy issues

• Both Co-CEOs have leadership roles on large clients

Paul Cuff 
Co-Chief Executive Officer
• Primarily responsible 
for raising the profile 
of XPS in the market 
and generating new 
business, both in 
traditional service areas 
and in the development 
of new services as the 
market evolves

• Develops the Group’s 

strategy with regard to 
M&A opportunities and 
technology investment

Ben Bramhall
Co-Chief Executive Officer
• Primarily responsible for 
the day-to-day operation 
of the business, including 
the provision of services 
to existing clients, 
revenue generation 
and the Group’s 
people strategy

• Develops the 

Group’s internal 
strategy to pursue 
large opportunities 
within the market

41

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
42

Board Effectiveness

Board operation and meetings 
Decisions on operational matters  
are delegated by the Board to the 
Executive Directors, consistent with the 
schedule of matters reserved for Board 
approval. In advance of scheduled 
Board meetings, each Director receives 
documentation providing updates on 
Group strategy, finances, operations 
and business development. The Board 
meets at least seven times a year and 
at other times as and when necessary. 

The Board reviews the business 
strategy for the year ahead at the 
beginning of each financial year, 
receives strategy updates at each 
Board meeting and at least once a year 
the Board will hold a strategy session 
to discuss and review business 
strategy. The Directors are expected to 
attend all meetings of the Board and 
any Committees of which they are 
members, and to devote sufficient time 
to the Company’s affairs to fulfil their 
duties as Directors. Non-Executive 
Directors each need to commit to a 
minimum of 28 days service per year  
to the Company. 

The Board are satisfied that each 
Non-Executive Director commits 
sufficient time to the Company. 
Non-Executive Directors remain in 
regular contact with the Chairman, 
whether in face-to-face meetings or by 

telephone, to discuss matters relating 
to the Company and have met several 
times during the year without the 
Executive Directors present.

If a Director is unable to attend a 
meeting, they will still receive Board 
papers before the meeting and they 
are encouraged to submit any 
comments to the Chairman to ensure 
that their views are recorded and taken 
into account during the meeting. The 
Director will also receive the minutes 
and matters arising in the usual way  
in order to ensure that they are  
fully informed.

The Board is ultimately responsible for 
the effectiveness and monitoring of the 
Group’s system of internal controls. 
The Audit and Risk Committee’s role is 
to assist the Board with its oversight 
responsibility by reviewing and 
monitoring the Company’s system of 
internal controls. It met four times in 
the financial year and at its meeting in 
June 2021 considered the internal 
controls assurance framework used 
during the financial year, concluding 
that it was sound and appropriate for 
the business. Directors are reminded at 
the commencement of each meeting 
to notify the Board of any conflicts of 
interest. Any actual or potential 
conflicts of Directors with the interests 
of the Company that arise must be 

disclosed for consideration and, if 
appropriate, authorisation by the Board 
in accordance with the Company’s 
Articles of Association. The Board  
may authorise conflicts and potential 
conflicts, as long as the potentially 
conflicted Director is not counted in 
the meeting quorum and does not vote 
on the resolution to authorise. 

Directors are required to notify the 
Group Chairman when a conflict or 
potential conflict does arise in order 
that Board authorisation can be 
considered. If the Board determines 
that a conflict or potential conflict can 
be authorised, it may impose additional 
conditions on the Director concerned.

A formal induction programme has 
been developed and tailored for any 
new Directors joining the Board. The 
Chairman, with the support of the 
Company Secretary, ensures that the 
development and ongoing training 
needs of individual Directors and the 
Board as a whole are reviewed and 
agreed following the annual 
performance evaluation of the Board, 
its Committees and individual Directors.

Directors may seek independent 
professional advice at the Company’s 
expense where they consider it 
appropriate in relation to their duties. 
All Directors have access to the advice 
and services of the Company Secretary.

Embedding culture

The Board recognises the importance of its role in setting the tone of the Group’s culture, championing the behaviours 
the Group expects to see and embedding these throughout the Group. In addition to the Board, the Executive 
Committee upholds the Group’s values and ensures that the importance of compliance and integrity is recognised at 
all levels throughout the Group. Sustainability and corporate culture are discussed with employees at Employee 
Engagement Group meetings.

Our people are fundamental to every aspect of our strategy and are committed to delivering the best for our clients. 
At XPS, our values are embedded in everything we do and we refer to them regularly in employee communications, 
team meetings, recruitment and new business activities with clients and prospective clients. The behaviours we aim to 
adopt in our new working model, ‘My XPS, My Choice’, are also aligned to our values in the form of a Behaviours 
Charter. 

We also celebrate the XPS – Values In Practice Awards annually, recognising employees and teams who have 
demonstrated the Group’s values in an exceptional way. 

As a Company, we plan to regularly review and audit our values and culture and appreciate the importance of this 
developing as the business develops. The Board has committed to auditing the Company’s culture in 2021.

We…

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

are 
ambitious 

do the 
right thing

are agile

are helpful

are experts

 
 
 
 
Engaging with Our Stakeholders

As a Group we identified our stakeholders and the ways  
in which we engage with them and consider their views 
during decision-making. Further details can be found 
within our section 172 statement on pages 28 to 29.

Employee engagement
As a Group we pride ourselves on 
effective employee engagement. 
Margaret Snowdon, OBE is the 
Group’s designated Employee 
Engagement Non-Executive Director 
and Chairs the Group’s Employee 
Engagement Group. Margaret reports 
back to the Board after every 
Employee Engagement Group 
meeting and acts as the ‘employee 
voice’ at Board meetings. The Group 
conducts an employee survey 
annually and the Board considers the 
results as a whole. 

Annual General Meeting
The Company’s Annual General 
Meeting (‘AGM’) will take place at 
12pm on Tuesday 7 September 2021 at 
the Group’s Reading office. The AGM 
notice setting out the resolutions to 
be proposed at the meeting and 
including explanatory notes, together 
with this Annual Report and Accounts, 
will be available on the Company’s 
website (www.xpsgroup.com) and 
distributed to shareholders who have 
elected to receive hard copies of 
shareholder information at least 20 

working days prior to the date of the 
meeting. Voting at the AGM will be 
conducted by way of a poll and the 
results will be announced through the 
London Stock Exchange Regulatory 
News Service and made available on 
the Company’s website. All Board 
members are expected to attend the 
meeting and the Chair of each of the 
Board’s Committees will be present 
to answer any questions put to them 
by shareholders.

Board evaluation
The Board acknowledges that the 
Code requires regular external Board 
evaluations (as a company below 
FTSE 350) and conducted an external 
board evaluation in 2020, facilitated 
by Ceradas Limited (‘Ceredas’). 

In 2021, the Board conducted 
an internal evaluation conducted  
by the Company Secretary and 
Chairman, using questionnaires  
and covering all aspects of Board 
effectiveness, including the 
Committees of the Board. All Board 
members completed the evaluation. 

2021 outcome
The overall outcome of the evaluation 
process was positive.The following 
actions were identified to further 
improve the effectiveness of the Board:
• The Board would consider other 
mechanisms for shareholder 
engagement, including holding  
a capital markets day, and would 
develop the Group’s Investor 
Relations function with external 
support; and

• The Board would work cohesively to 
continue key strategic themes and 
continue to hold an annual Board 
strategy session.

Review of Chairman’s  
performance
The Non-Executive Directors, 
in addition to their role of constructively 
challenging and facilitating the 
development of the Group’s strategy, 
met to evaluate the performance of 
the Chairman in May 2021, led by the 
Senior Independent Director. The 
Senior Independent Director also 
engaged with the Executive Directors 
separately for their feedback.  
The results of that process were 
communicated by the Senior 
Independent Director to the Board at 
its meeting in May 2021. 

2020 evaluation outcomes and progress
The 2020 evaluation identified the following areas for improvement, which have been improved as follows:

Actions from 2020

Improvements

Developing protocols to ensure consistency  
between Board reports, to facilitate Board discussion  
and decision-making.

Further reporting to support the Board’s discussions 
about strategic priorities and post-acquisition appraisals.

Further development of the Board and Audit and Risk 
Committee’s annual and ongoing overviews of internal 
controls and associated procedures.

Enhancing the Board’s approach to understanding  
the views of shareholders by developing current 
communication channels and ensuring informal 
shareholder feedback is shared with the full Board.

Board reporting has developed and is more focused, 
consistent and flags key discussion items.

The Co-CEOs report has been developed to focus on 
strategic priorities. A post acquisition appraisal process and 
structure has been agreed with the Board and appraisals 
have been completed in relation to the Royal London and 
Trigon bolt-on acquisitions.

Reviews of internal controls and associated procedures 
have increased during the year and the Audit and Risk 
Committee have received presentations on various business 
areas and their control environment. 

The Board has established a process for sharing 
shareholder feedback amongst Board members.

43

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport44

Nomination Committee Report

succession  
planning is a  
key component  
of good  
governance

A strong, diverse, qualified  
and competent Board and  
Senior Management team  
have been imperative to the 
continued growth of the  
Group throughout an 
extraordinary year.

Committee Membership  
and Attendance

Chair 
Tom Cross Brown 

Committee Members
Alan Bannatyne 
Sarah Ing  
Margaret Snowdon, OBE 

Attending by invitation
Co-Chief Executive Officers
Chief Financial Officer

2/2

2/2
2/2
2/2

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present the report 
of the Nomination Committee for 
the year-ended 31 March 2021. The 
Committee has met twice during 
the 2020/21 financial year and all 
meetings were attended by all 
members of the Committee. The 
Committee intends to continue to 
meet at least twice annually with 
additional meetings as required. 

The Nomination Committee assists 
the Board in determining the 
composition and make-up of the 
Board, including its skills, knowledge, 
experience and diversity. It is 
responsible for developing and 
maintaining a formal, rigorous and 
transparent procedure for identifying 
appropriate candidates for Board 
appointments and making 
recommendations to the Board. 

The Committee is also responsible for 
keeping under review the leadership 
needs of the Group, both Executive 
and Non-Executive, and for ensuring 
that succession planning focuses on 
the continued ability of the Group  
to deliver its strategic goals and 
compete effectively. The terms of 
reference of the Committee are 
reviewed annually and available  
on the Company’s website  
www.xpsgroup.com.

 
 
 
 
Membership of the Committee 
The members of the Committee are 
myself, Alan Bannatyne, Margaret 
Snowdon, OBE and Sarah Ing. 
Members of the management team, 
including the Executive Directors,  
are invited to Committee meetings  
as the agenda dictates.

Board changes
During the year, the Committee 
reviewed the size of the Board, the 
balance between Executive and 
Non-Executive Directors and the 
diversity of the Board; and was 
satisfied with the composition and 
balance of skills, experience, 
independence and knowledge of  
the Board and each Committee.

Sustainability Committee
During the year, a Sustainability 
Committee was formed. The 
Committee is chaired by Sarah Ing 
(Non-Executive Director), the other 
members are Margaret Snowdon, OBE 
(Non-Executive Director), Snehal Shah 
(Chief Financial Officer), Charlotte 
West (Head of Employee Engagement), 
Adrian Davison (Head of Risk) and 
Sarita Gosrani (Head of ESG for the 
Investment Business).

Board effectiveness evaluation 
In 2020, an external Board 
effectiveness evaluation was 
completed, you can read about the 
improvements made as a result of  
this on page 43. During the year,  
an internally facilitated Board 
effectiveness evaluation was 
completed, further details of the 
outcomes can be found on page 43. 

Succession planning 
During the year, the Nomination 
Committee reviewed detailed 
succession plans covering all key 
executive roles including those of  
the Executive Directors. 

The Committee is satisfied that the 
contingency and talent management 
plans in place for senior executive 
positions are appropriate, and has 
agreed that the Group’s succession 
planning should be kept under review, 
at least bi-annually.

Induction programme and training 
A formal tailored induction for 
Non-Executive Directors is in place 
supported by a programme of 
training, to further their knowledge  
of the Group, its business, culture, 
operations, employees and 
governance and to ensure awareness 
of their regulatory duties and 
obligations as a Director of a UK 
premium listed company. 

Diversity, equality and inclusion 
The Company has an established 
Diversity, Equality and Inclusion 
Group (DEIG), championed by 
Non-Executive Director Margaret 
Snowdon, OBE and chaired by a 
senior female within the Group.  
The DEIG has made great progress 
and had a significant impact across 
the business, and is a key channel  
of communication and engagement 
for employees. 

The Company acknowledges that 
there remains a gender pay gap within 
the business which reflects a higher 
proportion of males in higher paid 
roles than females. Whilst this is partly 
a challenge of the UK industry in 
which the Company operates, with a 
male-dominated actuarial profession,  

the Board believes it has a responsibility 
to promote change, both within the 
XPS Group and the industry more 
generally. We are pleased to report 
that the Company’s gender pay gap 
has reduced within the last year. We 
have completed an in-depth analysis 
into our gender pay gap, allowing us 
to consider where we need to 
concentrate our efforts to reduce the 
gap further. 

During the year, we have partnered 
with a specialist diversity and inclusion 
consultant, to drive forward our D&I 
strategy in 2021. 

The Board believes that no individual 
should be discriminated against, 
whether for reasons of gender, 
ethnicity or other grounds that restrict 
social inclusion, and this extends  
to Board appointments which it 
considers should be made on merit 
and on the basis of ensuring an 
appropriate balance of skills and 
experience within the Board. The 
Board recognises that greater 
diversity, in the widest sense of 
diversity of race, experience and 
approach, can generate a more 
diverse perspective on issues which,  
in turn, has the ability to benefit Board 
effectiveness through improved 
discussions and better decisions. 

You can find information regarding 
the Group’s gender balance, including 
senior management, on page 18 in the 
Responsible Business section.

Tom Cross Brown
Chair of the Nomination Committee
23 June 2021

45

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport46

Audit and Risk Committee Report

delivering 
independent 
oversight

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present the report 
of the Audit and Risk Committee for 
the year ended 31 March 2021. The 
Committee met four times during the 
2020/21 financial year and intends to 
continue to meet at least three times 
annually. All meetings were attended 
by all members of the Committee.

Membership of the Committee 
The members of the Committee are 
myself, Sarah Ing and Margaret 
Snowdon, OBE. The Board is satisfied 
that the Audit and Risk Committee 
as a whole has competence relevant 
to the sector in which the Group 
operates and that I and Sarah Ing 
have recent relevant financial 
experience as can be seen in our 
biographies included on pages 36 to 
37 of the Annual Report.

The Executive Directors are invited 
to each meeting as well as the 
Company’s Non-Executive Chairman, 
Chief Operating Officer, Head of 
Risk, General Counsel, Financial 
Controller and other members of  
the management team as the  
agenda dictates.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

The Committee supports  
the Board by reviewing the 
comprehensiveness and 
reliability of assurances on 
governance, risk management, 
the control environment and  
the integrity of the financial 
statements and the Group’s 
Annual Report.

Committee Membership  
and Attendance

Chair 
Alan Bannatyne 

Committee Members
Sarah Ing 
Margaret Snowdon, OBE 

Attending by invitation
Non-Executive Chairman
Co-Chief Executive Officers
Chief Financial Officer
Chief Operating Officer
Financial Controller
Head of Risk
General Counsel

4/4

4/4
4/4

 
 
 
 
Auditor
The Committee is responsible for 
making recommendations to the 
Board regarding the appointment 
of its external auditors and their 
remuneration. BDO LLP has been the 
Group’s Auditor since 2014. The Group 
Audit Partner is required to rotate 
after a maximum of five years; the 
current audit partner, Andrew 
Radford, was appointed in 
September 2020.

During the year the Committee 
undertook an audit tender exercise. The 
process was detailed and robust and 
involved invited firms meeting senior 
management from across the Group 
to allow them to consider the key risks 
relevant to XPS. After review of their 
written proposals and presentations, 
the Committee decided to retain BDO 
LLP as the Company’s Auditor. 

The Committee is responsible for 
making recommendations on the 
independence of the Group’s Auditor, 
BDO LLP. In addition, the Auditor has 
internal processes, which include peer 
reviews, to ensure that independence 
is maintained. The Committee will 
review the level of audit fees and 
non-audit fees on an ongoing basis. 
See Note 5 to the Financial 
Statements on page 98.

The Committee has reviewed the 
approach to the annual audit at a 
meeting that the Auditor attended 
ahead of the start of fieldwork. The 
Auditor then attended a further 
Committee meeting at the completion 
stage of the audit to present their 
findings. There is an open line of 
communication between the Chair 
of the Audit and Risk Committee and 
the audit engagement partner. The 
Committee assessed the effectiveness 
of the external audit process by 
obtaining feedback from parties 
involved in the process, including 
management and the external auditor.

Based on this feedback and its own 
ongoing assessment, the Committee 
remains satisfied with the efficiency 
and effectiveness of the audit.

After due and careful consideration, 
the Committee remains satisfied with 
the effectiveness and independence 
of BDO LLP and has recommended 
to the Board that BDO LLP be 
reappointed as the Group’s Auditor.

Significant accounting matters considered during the year

MATTERS CONSIDERED

ACTION

Revenue recognition, accrued income and trade receivables

Depending on the income stream 
and the nature of the engagement, 
the Group recognises revenue on 
either time cost incurred, fixed 
fee or rateably over the period of 
providing the relevant services. 
Billing is mainly in arrears and 
occurs monthly or quarterly. 

The Committee reviewed the 
approach to revenue recognition 
including the process for accrued 
and deferred revenue. The Committee 
receives regular updates on ageing 
of accrued revenue and trade 
receivables. The Committee has 
also considered the conclusions 
reached by BDO as part of their 
audit of this area and is satisfied that 
management has adopted appropriate 
processes and controls over revenue 
recognition, accrued revenue and 
trade receivables. 

Carrying value of goodwill and intangible assets

The Group has significant 
intangible assets on the balance 
sheet in the form of goodwill, 
customer relationships, brands 
and software. The intangible 
assets have to be reviewed for 
impairment at least annually 
or if there are any indicators 
of impairment.

The carrying value of all indefinite 
lived assets are tested for impairment 
annually. In reaching their conclusion 
that the treatment adopted is 
appropriate, the Committee 
has reviewed the forecasts, key 
assumptions and methodology 
adopted by management. BDO’s 
findings have also been considered 
by the Committee in reaching its 
conclusions over the appropriateness 
of the treatment within the 
financial statements.

Amortisation of customer relationship intangible assets

The Group reviews its intangible 
assets and related amortisation 
annually. The Group considered 
whether there was new 
information or more experience 
which would lead to a change  
in the amortisation method and 
rate used for these assets.

Following a detailed review, a change 
in estimate was applied to a sub set of 
the customer relationship asset. The 
amortisation method was changed 
from reducing balance to straight line. 
In addition, the useful economic life of 
the assets in question was reviewed 
and extended from 10 to 20 years.  
This is in line with similar assets, and is 
evidenced by customer retention 
levels. This change was reviewed by 
the Committee and BDO, and it was 
agreed to be appropriate.

Presentation and disclosure of exceptional and non-trading items

The Group classifies certain items 
in the income statement as 
exceptional/non-trading to allow 
a clearer understanding of the 
underlying trading performance 
of the business. 

Exceptional and non-trading items 
in the year totalled £13.9 million 
(2020: £12.8 million). In particular, 
management have made a 
number of judgements regarding 
costs arising due to the Covid-19 
pandemic. For more details, see 
Note 6 to the Financial Statements 
on page 99.

As part of their assessment that the 
treatment of exceptional/non-trading 
items in the financial statements is 
appropriate, consistent with the 
Group’s accounting policies and with 
the guidance issued by the FRC, the 
Committee has considered each of  
the items treated as exceptional/
non-trading and challenged, where 
necessary, the treatment adopted by 
management. The Committee has also 
considered the conclusions reached 
by BDO as part of its audit in this area 
and is satisfied. With regard to the 
Covid-19 related exceptional costs 
management judgements have been 
challenged both by the Committee 
and by BDO, and they have both 
concluded the classification as 
exceptional to be appropriate. 

47

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport48

Audit and Risk Committee Report (continued)

Internal Audit
An Internal Audit function has been  
in operation, using a co-sourcing 
agreement with PwC since 2017.  
It offers independent oversight of 
operational and risk management 
activities, with audit reports and 
relevant findings presented to the 
Committee. This year in addition to 
the annual programme of reviews,  
it also focused on the Pensions 
Investment Consulting business and 
no significant control weaknesses 
were identified. The Internal Audit 
programme is supported by a number 
of regular assurance activities which 
are carried out by the internal Risk 
and Compliance teams, which look  
at the design and effectiveness of 
internal controls for key processes.

Annual Report review
A final draft of the Annual Report is 
reviewed by the Committee prior to 
consideration by the Board and the 
Committee considered whether the 
2021 Annual Report was fair, balanced 
and understandable and whether it 
provided the necessary information 
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and 
strategy. The Committee was satisfied 
that, taken as a whole, the Annual 
Report is fair, balanced and 
understandable and provides the 
necessary information.

Risk
We have continued to enhance our 
risk management framework. This is 
supported by a strong culture, active 
engagement from staff and a clear 
direction from Executive Management.

The standardised risk management 
framework supports a common 
approach across all businesses and 
support functions in the Group. This 
includes a clear articulation of the key 
risks, the appetite the Group has for 
each of these and the controls that are 
in place to manage these risks within 
their stated appetites. 

The framework embraces the whole 
spectrum of activities and measures 
addressing risk (identification, 
evaluation, treatment, reporting and 
monitoring) which, taken together, 
support the achievement of the 
organisation’s objectives. The 
underlying processes and control 
procedures are regularly reviewed and 
amended to reflect the findings of the 
process, including improvements in 
operational administration, regulatory 
compliance, legislative changes and 
the external threat environment.

A reporting framework has been 
deployed as part of this work which 
provides Executive Management with 
regular updates on our overall risk 
profile and detailed reports on risks 
that may require action to keep within 
appetite. This framework includes 
information on relevant Key Risk 
Indicators as well as summarising 
root-cause analysis reviews for 
incidents and errors.

The Risk Management Committee 
(‘RMC’) continues to meet on a 
regular basis to discuss risks and 
issues as well as ensuring that the 
framework is meeting the needs of  
the Group’s stakeholders. The RMC 
also acts as the mechanism by which 
risks reported at business level can  
be considered in the context of the 
Group and whether escalation 
is required.

The Group Risk Team supports all 
businesses within the Group and 
ensures best practices are applied 
consistently. This team is also 
responsible for co-ordinating the 
existing external assurance activities 
carried out across the Group into the 
audit plans approved by Executive 
Management, to ensure all risks  
and controls are considered and 
assessed appropriately. 

These assurance activities include 
certifications to ISO 9001 and ISO 
27001, AAF 01/06, IIP and the IoA 
Quality Assurance Scheme (‘QAS’).

The Audit and Risk Committee regularly 
reviews the wider internal control 
processes and enlists external support 
to review and test when it is deemed 
necessary. Recognising the importance 
of the protection of data assets and 
business resilience, the Committee 
considers these specific risks at  
each of its meetings, along with the 
development of the frameworks to 
effectively manage them. 

We are pleased to note that our Risk 
Management frameworks have proved 
effective in allowing the Group to 
successfully react to the recent Covid-19 
pandemic, allowing us to continue to 
provide our services and manage the 
new and changing risk environment.

Whistleblowing
The Group has a clear, formalised 
Whistleblowing Policy and procedure 
available to all staff in order to raise 
concerns about perceived wrongdoing, 
non-compliance with our own 
standards, regulatory requirements 
and/or the law. This policy was 
reviewed this year. We have a 
confidential helpline, run by a third 
party, Expolink, in order that staff  
can report any concerns or perceived 
shortcomings within our operations 
without fear of sanction or 
disadvantage. The helpline is 
promoted through the intranet and 
posters. Incidents are reported and 
then reviewed by the Board at the 
next available meeting or sooner if 
appropriate. The Group’s Audit and 
Risk Committee reviews the policy 
and process annually to ensure 
they remain fit for purpose.

Alan Bannatyne
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee
23 June 2021

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Sustainability Committee Report

sustainability  
is fundamental  
to our mission

I am enthusiastic about the new  
Board Sustainability Committee.  
XPS’s sustainable strategy needs  
to be at the heart of what we are  
and how we act. 

Committee Membership  
and Attendance

Chair 
Sarah Ing 

3/3

Committee Members
Margaret Snowdon, OBE  3/3
3/3
Snehal Shah 
3/3
Charlotte West 
3/3
Adrian Davison 
3/3
Sarita Gosrani 

The Sustainability Committee was 
created to support the Board with 
considering, reviewing and driving 
initiatives for matters related to 
environmental, social and governance 
(ESG) that have a material impact  
on business strategy, business 
performance and the long-term 
sustainability of the Company. The 
Committee has oversight of the views 
and interests of the internal and 
external stakeholders of the Company 
including employees, customers and 
community relating to sustainability.

Membership of the Committee 
The members of the Committee are 
myself, Margaret Snowdon, OBE, 
Snehal Shah (CFO), Charlotte West 
(Head of Employee Engagement), 
Adrian Davison (Head of Risk) and 
Sarita Gosrani (Head of ESG for the 
Investment business). Other Board 
members and members of the 
management team are invited to 
meetings as the agenda dictates.

The Role of the Committee
The Group has been involved in a  
wide variety of sustainability-related 
activities during the year and one  
the key aims for the Sustainability 
Committee is to ensure that the 
Group’s activities and reporting on 
ESG/sustainability matters are 
brought together in a coherent way; 
and to provide oversight and 
challenge thereof.

As a business we are committed  
to acting responsibly in our mission for 
better outcomes for scheme members 
and society. We are ‘ambitious’  
to do the right thing for all of our 
stakeholders and especially our people 
who are at the core of what we do. 

The Committee has met three times 
during the 2020/21 financial year and all 
meetings were attended by all members 
of the Committee. The Committee 
intends to continue to meet at least 
twice annually with additional meetings 
as required.

The Focus of the Committee
The Committee has set out the Group’s 
key areas of focus – governance, our 
employees, our clients, our communities 
and our environment.

The Committee discussed current 
practices in each of the key areas 
identified above and is working to set 
aspirational goals in key areas. 

At a high level, the focus for the year 
ahead includes: 
• Oversight of progress to embed the 
Group sustainability strategy and 
steps towards its commitments;
• Engaging with key stakeholders, 
respond to their feedback and 
concerns, report on progress, and 
embed sustainability in corporate 
culture and Board decision making; and

• Understanding and driving key 

sustainability topics to support the 
fulfilment of the Committee’s duties.

The Committee is also responsible 
for the Group’s reporting on ESG/
Sustainability matters. Refer to pages 
16 to 21 of the Strategic Report. 
As part of this remit, the Committee 
reviews and challenges activities 
carried out within the business aligned 
with the sustainability strategy 
(approved by the Board) ensuring that 
the strategy is embedded throughout 
the organisation. The Committee  
will keep sustainability best practice 
under review, referring to thought 
leadership, and monitors the Group’s 
position regarding relevant emerging 
sustainability issues. 

The terms of reference of the 
Committee are reviewed annually and 
available on the Company’s website 
www.xpsgroup.com.

Sarah Ing
Chair of the Sustainability Committee
23 June 2021

49

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport50

Directors’ Remuneration Report

remuneration 
at a glance

The overall remuneration policy is designed to 
promote the long-term success of the Group  
whilst ensuring it does not support inappropriate 
risk-taking. The Remuneration Committee has 
developed the Directors’ Remuneration Policy  
with the following principles in mind:

Competitive – remuneration  
packages are reviewed annually and 
benchmarked by reference to the 
external market. This allows us to 
attract and retain highly talented 
people, who know that good 
performance will be rewarded. 

Designed to encourage retention  
and to reward performance – 
deferred variable remuneration does 
not give rise to any immediate 
entitlement. Long-term incentive 
awards normally require the 
participant to be employed 
continuously by the Group until at 
least the third anniversary of grant in 
order to vest in full. 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Aligned with shareholders – in order 
to motivate Executive Directors and 
incentivise the delivery of sustained 
performance over the long term,  
and to promote alignment with 
shareholders’ interests.

Aligned with financial performance 
– to motivate Executive Directors  
and support the delivery of the 
Group’s financial and strategic 
business targets.

Aligned with colleagues – by striving 
for as consistent as possible an 
approach between the Executive 
Directors and Senior Management. 

Aligned with clients – the continued 
strategy to become the pre-eminent 
pensions consulting and administration 
firm in the UK at the same time as 
achieving sustainable growth through 
investing in client services, technology 
and staff demonstrates the 
commitment to provide an agile, 
high-quality and market-leading 
service that puts client satisfaction  
at the heart of the business.

 
 
 
 
Our Executive Directors’ remuneration at a glance

Key features of the policy

How we implemented the policy 

Fixed Pay

Salary and 
benefits

Annual increases will not exceed  
7.5% + RPI (April 2021: 10.4%) or  
the average increase of employees 
across the Group in any given year, 
whichever is higher.

Short-term variable pay 
Financial/functional  
and personal objectives 
set with reference to 
business plans approved 
by the Board.

Cash bonus

The maximum opportunity for 
2020/21 is 150% of salary and 
potentially payable in cash and 
deferred shares. Malus and 
clawback provisions apply.

XPS 
Performance 
Share Plan 
(‘PSP’)

Bonus is payable subject to the 
achievement of performance 
conditions (financial and personal 
objectives) which will be set by the 
Remuneration Committee. Malus 
and clawback provisions apply.

Maximum ‘normal’ grant level is 150% 
of salary.

Malus and clawback provisions apply. 

Aligned with long-term business 
strategy to become the pre-eminent 
pensions consulting and 
administration firm in the UK and 
delivery of shareholder value due to 
strong cash generation and non-
cyclical demand for services. 

Long-term variable pay
Stretching performance 
conditions measured  
over a three-year period 
with a further two-year 
post-performance  
holding period.

Performance conditions 
based upon adjusted 
earnings per share / TSR 
to comparator group.

Share ownership 
guidelines

Increases of 9% applied effective  
1 April 2021 as the first phase of  
a market-adjustment. This is the 
first increase for three years and is 
below the general level of salary 
growth across the Group since  
1 April 2018. A second increase  
is intended to be made from 1 
April 2022 – see page 54.

The Co-CEOs were awarded  
102% of salary and the CFO  
was awarded 77% of salary, as 
determined by the Remuneration 
Committee. These payments 
amounted to 68% of maximum.

Bonuses were paid on financial 
performance as well as personal 
objectives (detailed on pages 63 
to 64).

The July 2018 PSP award is 
subject to underlying EPS 
performance and relative TSR 
performance. The overall payout 
for the award is equal to an 
estimated 21.3% of maximum.

Share 
ownership 
guidelines 

Minimum shareholding of 200% of base salary for any Executive  
Director with requirements applying for a two-year period post 
termination of employment.

Remuneration at a glance: pay outcomes for the year 
2020/21 Fixed remuneration 

Co-CEOs

£288,000

Base salary

CFO

£243,270

Co-CEOs

6% of salary

Pension

CFO

6% of salary

These pension contributions are in line with the average contribution levels across the Group. 

Annual bonus 
The financial element of these bonuses is based on Group Profit Before Tax (‘PBT’). The reported Group Adjusted PBT 
for 2020/21 resulted in a bonus payment of 67% of the maximum for this element of the bonus. When combined with 
the performance against strategic objectives, this led to bonuses of 68% of the maximum. Further details of financial 
and personal objectives can be found on pages 63 to 64.

£m

Threshold 
(£’000)

Target
 (£’000)

Maximum 
(£’000)

Actual 
(£’000)

Payout
(% of this 
element)

Group Adj. PBT (75% of potential)

24,660

25,215

26,180

25,230

67%

51

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport52

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

delivering fair 
remuneration for 
performance

Dear Shareholder,

The Directors’ Remuneration Report 
for the year ended 31 March 2021 
contains:
• my annual statement;
• the annual report on remuneration 
which describes how the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy has been 
applied in the 2020/21 financial year 
and how it will be implemented in 
the 2021/22 financial year; and
• the Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
which, following engagement with 
our largest shareholders in 2021, 
remains unchanged since it was 
approved at the 2020 AGM.

The Remuneration Committee 
continues to ensure a robust  
link between the execution  
of strategy, reward and 
performance and is committed  
to fairness and transparency.

Margaret Snowdon, OBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Membership and attendance

Chair 
Margaret Snowdon 

Committee Members
Tom Cross Brown 
Alan Bannatyne 
Sarah Ing 

Attending by invitation
Co-CEOs
CFO
COO
HR Director

8/8

8/8
8/8
8/8

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Response to Covid-19
During the year ended 31 March 2021, 
we continued to manage the 
challenges that the pandemic 
presented throughout the year  
and produced a robust financial 
performance, which demonstrated  
the resilience of the Group’s business 
model and strong client base. At a 
Group level, total revenues grew  
7% year on year. Excluding the 
contribution from acquisitions, 
revenues grew by 6% in the year. 

The Group delivered Adjusted Diluted 
Earnings Per Share of 9.8p. This  
builds on growth in Adjusted Diluted 
Earnings Per Share since XPS  
was floated on the London Stock 
Exchange in 2017 of 36%. 

At the same time, we concentrated  
on the mental health and well-being  
of our colleagues. No XPS Group 
employees were furloughed during 
the pandemic and no Government 
assistance was received. Policies were 
put in place to support staff who 
could not work as normal because  
of the pandemic and the Group has 
increased its dividend throughout the 
pandemic. You can read more about 
the Company’s response to Covid-19 
and how we supported our staff on 
pages 22 and 33.

Engaging with our stakeholders 
Shareholders
At last year’s Annual General Meeting 
held on 8th September 2020, the 
Remuneration Committee was 
pleased that shareholders approved 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
with 96.06% and the Remuneration 
Report with 99.98% of votes for.  
We are grateful for the ongoing 
shareholder engagement and 
constructive feedback allowing us to 
ensure we are able to reflect the views 
of shareholders in the decisions that 
the Remuneration Committee makes.

Employees
The Employee Engagement Group, 
which I chair as XPS Group’s 
Employee Engagement Director, 
considers Executive Directors’ 
remuneration, taking account of 
employee views. The Employee 

Engagement Group was set up with 
the purpose of providing an ‘employee 
voice’ to the Board by raising any 
matters or issues highlighted by 
employees. It is a forum for employees 
to share ideas and concerns with the 
Board in a consultative manner and  
is not a decision-making group. It 
meets at least twice a year and has 
met virtually during the pandemic. 
One area of focus for the Employee 
Engagement Group is reward and 
remuneration of Executive Directors; 
members are asked to provide 
feedback on the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy and their 
remuneration arrangements. This 
improves engagement between the 
Board and Group employees.

The Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy 2020
I said last year that the pandemic 
prevented us from holding meetings 
with our largest shareholders to 
consult on the proposed new 
incentive arrangements. We asked 
shareholders to approve a new Policy 
in 2020 on the basis that we would 
seek approval for a fresh Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy at the 
Company’s 2021 AGM. In April and 
May of this year, I engaged with 
several of our largest shareholders 
about changes to our approach to 
long-term incentive arrangements. 
This entailed reducing the maximum 
value of both short-term and long-
term incentives and the replacement 
performance shares with time-vested 
restricted shares. Our original 
proposal was to increase the value of 
long-term remuneration, as opposed 
to making any market-related 
increases to fixed pay. The proposed 
changes were designed to ensure 
greater internal alignment in our 
approach to remuneration as we 
already award restricted shares for 
senior employees below the Board. 
I listened carefully to our largest 
investors and am very grateful for 
their constructive input. In the light of 
their views, we have decided to make 
no further changes to the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy but rather to 
work within the Policy to enhance 
its effectiveness. The decisions we 
have subsequently agreed reflect 
the mixed views of our largest 

shareholders on restricted shares 
in place of performance shares and, 
at the same time, many were 
concerned to ensure that the 
remuneration packages of the 
Executive Directors were more 
competitive and said that a significant 
adjustment to basic salaries was 
necessary to align them to the market. 
Our investors are well aware that base 
salaries are low and have given us 
strong encouragement to remedy this. 

The changes to the operation  
of the 2020 Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy

1  Phased adjustments to the  

base salaries of the Executive 
Directors

The current Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy, which was developed as part 
of the IPO process in 2017, was heavily 
influenced by the selling shareholders. 
During their period of ownership  
and at the point of their sale, more 
emphasis on variable pay and fixed 
pay was kept deliberately low.

The consequence is that:
• Base salaries are low against the 

FTSE Small Cap market and other 
similarly-sized companies, even  
after applying a discount for having 
Co-CEOs and leaving aside the fact 
that each of the them have client-
facing responsibilities in addition to 
their Executive management and 
Board responsibilities. Their salaries 
are significantly below the market at 
c.70% of the discounted lower 
quartile (60% of the unadjusted lower 
quartile). The CFO’s salary is also 
below the lower quartile position.
• Even though total variable pay at 

300% of base salary for the Co-CEOs 
is high (as a percentage of salary) 
when compared with FTSE Small 
Cap practice, their total target and 
total maximum pay is well below the 
market median for similarly-sized 
companies and nearer to the lower 
quartile. The CFO’s total variable 
pay (as a percentage of salary) is 
also above the median position and 
yet his total target and maximum 
remuneration are at or around the 
lower quartile of the market for 
comparable roles. This is because 
salary levels are relatively low.

53

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport54

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

Remuneration of the Executive Directors for 2021/22
The table below summarises our intended approach to the remuneration of the 
Executive Directors for 2021/2022. 

The Remuneration Committee has 
therefore decided to increase the base 
salaries of the Executive Directors in 
two phases:
• 9% with effect from 1 April 2021. 
This is the first increase for three 
years and is below the general level 
of increases for employees across 
the Group since 1 April 2018; and
• 6% with effect from 1 April 2022 
(subject to continued strong 
performance both corporate and 
individual).

This still leaves target and maximum 
total remuneration for all the Executive 
Directors below the market median.

2 Continuation of awards under the 

performance share plan 
with current measures and 
new weightings

The Remuneration Committee has 
reviewed the current performance 
measures of Adjusted EPS growth  
and relative Total Shareholder Return 
(measured against the FTSE Small 
Cap excluding investment trusts) and 
takes the view that EPS and returns  
to shareholders both absolute and 
relative remain key performance 
indicators and should be retained. 
They are transparent, fair and well 
understood by all and support our 
desire for simplicity of design. Given 
the importance of earnings and 
profitability as a driver of shareholder 
value, we have also decided to 
increase the weighting of Adjusted 
EPS to 75% of the total (with relative 
TSR having a weighting of 25%).

As we have made these decisions,  
we have thought carefully about XPS, 
our employees and the culture that we 
want to encourage. We recruit highly 
skilled people who are motivated to 
perform well. This is just as true of 
the Executive Directors as it is of 
all employees. 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Component of 
remuneration

Base salary  
and benefits

Pension

Annual bonus

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
can be found on pages 56 to 60.

Long-term  
incentives

Summary of approach

Base salary and benefits are reviewed annually on 1 April 
2021 in light of a number of factors, including the 
approach to salary reviews more generally across the 
Group. The base salaries of the Co-Chief Executive 
Officers have been increased by 9% for the 2021/22 
financial year: 
Ben Bramhall – £313,920
Paul Cuff – £313,920

This is the first increase since 1 April 2018 and is below the 
general level of salary increases across the Group since 
then:

1 April 
2019 

1 April 
2020 

1 April 
2021 

Co-CEOs 

0% 

0% 

Average Staff 

3.0% 

3.2% 

9.0% 

3.2% 

Total 

9.0% 

9.7% 

The base salary for the Chief Financial Officer has also 
been increased by 9% (reflecting Snehal’s growing 
experience in the role) and will therefore be:
Snehal Shah – £265,160

In all three cases this is the first intended increase of two. 
The second increase of 6% will, subject to continuing 
strong corporate and individual performance, be 
implemented from 1 April 2022.

Defined contribution/cash supplements of 6% are paid 
and are aligned with the levels available for new 
employees. This is well below the rate provided to many 
employees who have joined the business through the 
acquisitions we have made.

Payable subject to the achievement of challenging 
financial/strategic/personal performance conditions. 
These are expected to incorporate sustainability, culture 
and technology-based goals. Malus and clawback 
provisions apply. 
Maximum bonus opportunity:
Ben Bramhall – 150% of salary
Paul Cuff – 150% of salary
Snehal Shah – 112.5% of salary

Annual awards of performance shares. Shares vest, 
subject to the achievement of the performance 
conditions, after three years and are subject to a further 
2-year holding period. Malus and clawback provisions 
apply. Maximum grant levels:
Ben Bramhall – 150% of salary
Paul Cuff – 150% of salary
Snehal Shah – 125% of salary

All-employee  
share plans

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in all of the 
Company’s employee share plans, including the Share 
Save Plan, on the same terms as other employees.

Share ownership 
guidelines

Executive Directors are subject to a minimum 
shareholding requirement of 200% of salary with a 
requirement to maintain a shareholding post cessation 
of employment at 200% for one year and 100% for a 
second year.

 
 
 
 
Annual bonus payments for 2020/21 
The financial element of these bonuses is based on Group Profit Before 
Tax (‘PBT’). The reported Group Adjusted PBT for 2020/21 has resulted in 
a bonus payment of 67% of the maximum for this element of the bonus. 
When combined with the performance against strategic objectives, this 
leads to bonuses of 68% of the maximum. 

On this basis, the bonus outturn for 2020/21 for the Executive Directors is 
as follows: 

Executive Director

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

Snehal Shah

% of
salary

102%

102%

77%

% of
maximum

68%

68%

68%

Vesting outcomes for the 
2018 PSP awards
The July 2018 PSP award is subject 
to underlying EPS performance 
and relative TSR performance. The 
estimated overall pay-out for the 
award is equal to 21.3% of maximum.

The Committee considers that the 
Policy operated as intended during 
2020/21 and that remuneration 
outcomes are consistent with the 
Group performance and appropriately 
reflect performance delivered for our 
shareholders over the respective 
periods. The Committee felt that no 
discretion needed to be applied for 
these remuneration outcomes.

Other activities to note
The Remuneration Committee 
reviewed the Group’s gender pay gap 
analyses and action plans. I have also 
continued to play an active role 
throughout the year on the Group’s 
Diversity, Equality and Inclusion 
Working Group, in addition to chairing 
the Employee Engagement Group.

I trust that you find this report to be 
informative and transparent and I 
hope to receive your support for our 
decisions this year as described in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report at the 
AGM. I am keen to encourage ongoing 
open dialogue with our shareholders 
on executive remuneration and 
welcome all engagement.

Margaret Snowdon, OBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
23 June 2021

55

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport56

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

Directors’ Remuneration Policy 2020
This Directors’ Remuneration Policy, which has been approved by the Board and shareholders, has been prepared in 
accordance with Part 4 of The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) 
Regulations 2013, which amended The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
Regulations 2008 (‘the DRR Regulations’).

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy as set out in this section of the Directors’ Remuneration Report was approved last 
year and took effect in respect of all payments made to Directors with effect from the conclusion of the 2020 AGM at 
which it was approved. The Policy as approved can be found at https://www.xpsgroup.com/investors/results-reports-
and-presentations. We have reproduced some of the main sections of the Directors’ Policy here for the convenience of 
our shareholders even though we have not, as envisaged before the engagement process with investors made any 
changes to it.

Summary of Decision-Making Process and Changes to Policy
The Remuneration Committee’s review of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy followed a robust process which included 
discussions on the content of the Policy at Remuneration Committee meetings during the year. The Committee 
considered the input from management and independent advisors, as well as consulting with major shareholders and 
proxy and advisory services. The input from investors was critical in influencing our view that we should work within the 
Policy as approved in 2020.

Element and purpose

Policy and operation

Maximum

Performance measures

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Base salary
The core element of 
pay, reflecting the 
individual’s position 
within the Company 
and experience

The base salary of each Executive 
Director takes into account the 
performance of each individual  
and is set at an appropriate level to 
secure and retain the talent needed to 
deliver the Group’s strategic 
objectives. Salaries are reviewed 
annually on 1 April and are influenced 
by: information from relevant 
comparator groups (referencing the 
Group’s competitors and public 
companies in other industries); the 
performance of each individual 
Executive Director; and average 
increases for employees across the 
Group as a whole.

Benefits in kind
To provide market-
competitive benefits 
valued by recipients

Pension
To provide retirement 
benefits

Benefits currently include permanent 
health insurance, life insurance, private 
medical insurance and car allowance 
and may also include other benefits in 
the future. In certain limited 
circumstances, relocation allowances 
may be necessary. 

All benefits are subject to annual 
review to ensure they remain in line 
with market practice. 

Executive Directors participating  
in the pension plan benefit from 
matching annual Group contributions 
of 6% of base salary. Executive 
Directors are entitled to take all or part 
of their pension contributions as a 
cash allowance.

n/a

Annual increases will not exceed 
7.5% + RPI or the average 
increase of employees across 
the Group in any given year, 
whichever is higher. The level of 
increase may deviate from this 
maximum in the case of special 
circumstances for example, 
increases in responsibilities or 
promotion. As an example, this 
may occur if the market 
capitalisation of the Company 
increases as the shares are 
‘re-rated’ by investors such that 
the comparator group changes. 

In this scenario, the Board 
would consider the increase 
and the performance of the 
Company. Other elements of 
remuneration may also change. 
In these cases, any exceptional 
increase will not exceed 20% of 
salary a year.

n/a

Benefits (excluding any 
relocation allowances) may be 
provided up to an aggregate 
value of normally £30,000 for 
each Executive Director 
(indexed to inflation).

The maximum employer’s 
contribution (or cash 
supplement) is 6% of salary.

n/a

Executive Directors’ employer’s 
contribution levels are aligned  
to the contribution levels for 
the majority of the workforce.

 
 
 
 
Element and purpose

Policy and operation

Maximum

Performance measures

The maximum annual bonus 
opportunity is 150% of base 
salary. For 2021/22, the 
maximum opportunity will be 
150% of base salary for the 
Co-CEOs and 112.5% of salary 
for other Executive Directors.

The market value of shares to 
be awarded to Executive 
Directors in respect of any year 
will normally be up to 150% of 
base salary, with awards of a 
maximum of 200% allowable in 
exceptional circumstances.

Annual bonus
To motivate 
Executive Directors 
and support the 
delivery of the 
Group’s financial 
and strategic 
business target 
over a one-year 
operating cycle

Performance  
Share Plan
To motivate 
Executive Directors 
and incentivise the 
delivery of sustained 
performance over  
the long term, and to 
promote alignment 
with shareholders’ 
interests

Annual bonus plan levels and the 
appropriateness of measures are 
reviewed annually to ensure they 
continue to support our strategy.  
Once set, performance measures  
and targets will generally remain 
unchanged for the year, except 
to reflect events (e.g. corporate 
acquisitions, other major transactions) 
where the Committee considers it to 
be necessary in its opinion to make 
appropriate adjustments.

The Remuneration Committee retains 
the flexibility to pay annual bonus 
outcomes in cash and/or deferred 
shares (which may allow for dividend 
roll-up). The number of shares (or the 
cash equivalent) subject to deferral 
may be increased to reflect the value 
of dividends that would have been 
paid in respect of any record dates 
falling during the deferral period.

Clawback and malus provision apply 
as explained in more detail in the notes 
to this Policy table.

Awards under the PSP may be 
granted as nil/nominal cost options 
which vest to the extent performance 
conditions are satisfied over a period 
normally of at least three years.

Awards will vest at the end of the 
specified vesting period at the 
discretion of the Remuneration 
Committee and are subject to a 
further holding period of two years  
(or such shorter period so that the 
period from the date of grant until the 
end of the holding period will be equal 
to five years).

The PSP rules allow that the number  
of shares (or the cash equivalent) 
subject to vested PSP awards may  
be increased to reflect the value of 
dividends that would have been paid 
in respect of any record dates falling 
between the grant of awards and the 
expiry of any vesting period.

Clawback and malus provisions 
applied are explained in more detail in 
the notes to this Policy table.

Bonuses will be payable subject 
to the achievement of 
performance conditions which 
will be set by the Remuneration 
Committee.

The targets may be financial 
and/or personal and strategic. 
The intended weighting of these 
measures is not less than 60% 
financial. Where a sliding scale  
of targets is used, attaining the 
threshold level of performance  
for any measure will not typically 
produce a payout of more than 
20% of the maximum portion of 
overall annual bonus attributable 
to that measure, with a sliding 
scale to full payout for maximum 
performance. Bonus payments 
will also be subject to the 
Committee considering that the 
proposed bonus amounts, 
calculated by reference to 
performance against the 
targets, appropriately reflect the 
Company’s overall performance 
and shareholders’ experience. If 
the Committee does not believe 
this to be the case, it retains the 
discretion to adjust the bonus 
outturn accordingly.

The Remuneration Committee 
may impose such conditions as 
it considers appropriate which 
must be satisfied before any 
award will vest.

All awards made to Executive 
Directors will be subject to 
performance conditions which 
measure performance over a 
period normally no less than 
three years. Awards in 2021 will 
be subject to EPS and relative 
TSR performance weighted 
75/25.

No more than 25% of awards 
vest for attaining the threshold 
level of performance.

Formulaic outcome of all PSP 
performance measures will also  
be subject to the Committee 
considering that the proposed 
levels, calculated by reference  
to performance against the 
targets, appropriately reflect the 
Company’s overall performance 
and shareholders’ experience. If 
the Committee does not believe 
this to be the case, it retains the 
discretion to adjust the PSP 
outturn accordingly.

57

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport58

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

Element and purpose

Policy and operation

Share ownership 
guidelines
To promote 
stewardship and to 
further align the 
interests of Executive 
Directors with those 
of shareholders

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

All-employee share 
plans
To facilitate and 
encourage share 
ownership by staff, 
thereby allowing 
everyone to share in 
the long-term 
success of the 
Company and align 
interests with those 
of shareholders

The share ownership guidelines 
encourage Executive Directors to 
build or maintain (as appropriate) 
a shareholding in the Company.

Minimum shareholding of 200% of 
base salary for any Executive Director. 

If any Executive Director does not 
meet the guideline, they will be 
expected to retain up to 50% of the net 
of tax number of shares vesting under 
any of the Company’s discretionary 
share incentive arrangements 
(including any deferred bonus shares) 
until the guideline is met.

Executive Directors are required 
to maintain a shareholding in the 
Company for a two-year period after 
stepping down from that position, 
being in the first year, the lesser of  
the guideline level or each Executive 
Director’s relevant shareholding at 
leaving and reducing to 50% of this 
requirement in the second year.

For the purpose of this requirement, 
the relevant shareholding will include 
shares vesting under any of the 
Company’s discretionary share 
incentive arrangements (including any 
deferred bonus shares) from awards 
granted after 8 September 2020, but 
excludes shares acquired and the 
release of shares under share incentive 
plans where the grant occurred prior 
to this date. The Committee retains the 
discretion to remove the holding 
requirement if it is deemed to 
be inappropriate.

The Executive Directors will be entitled 
to participate in all of the Company’s 
employee share plans, including the 
Share Save Plan, on the same terms as 
other employees.

These all-employee share plans 
are established under HMRC tax-
advantaged regimes and follow the 
usual form for such plans.

Maximum

n/a

Performance measures

n/a

The maximum participation 
levels for all-employee share 
plans will be the limits for such 
plans set by HMRC from time to 
time. However the Company 
may impose lower limits on a 
scheme-by-scheme basis.

Consistent with normal practice 
and/or HMRC requirements, 
such awards would not be 
subject to performance 
conditions.

 
 
 
 
Element and purpose

Policy and operation

Maximum

Performance measures

n/a

The aggregate fees and any 
benefits of the Chairman and 
Non-Executive Directors will 
not exceed the limit from time 
to time prescribed within the 
Company’s Articles of 
Association for such fees 
currently £500,000 p.a. 
in aggregate.

Any increases in fee levels 
made will be appropriately 
disclosed.

Chairman and 
Non-Executive 
Directors’ fees
To enable the 
Company to 
recruit and retain 
Company Chairs 
and Non-Executive 
Directors of the 
highest calibre, at 
the appropriate cost

The fees paid to the Chairman and 
Non-Executive Directors aim to be 
competitive with other listed companies 
of equivalent size and complexity.

The fees payable to the Non-Executive 
Directors are determined by the 
Board, with the Chairman’s fees 
determined by the Committee. No 
Director participates in decisions 
regarding their own fees.

The Chairman and Non-Executive 
Directors do not participate in any new 
cash or share incentive plans.

The Chairman and Non-Executive 
Directors are entitled to benefits 
relating to travel and office support 
and such other benefits as may be 
considered appropriate.

The Chairman is paid a single fee  
for the role, although he will be 
entitled to an additional fee if he is 
required to perform any specific and 
additional services.

Non-Executive Directors receive a  
base fee for the role. Additional fees are 
paid for acting as Senior Independent 
Director or for Chairman of the  
Audit, Remuneration or other Board 
Committees or to the Designated 
Employee Engagement Non-Executive 
Director to reflect the additional time 
commitment. They will be entitled to 
an additional fee if they are required  
to perform any specific and additional 
services.

Notes to the Policy table
1. Stating maxima for each element of the Remuneration Policy The Regulations and related investor guidance 

encourage companies to disclose a cap within which each element of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy will operate. 
Where maximum amounts for elements of remuneration have been set within the Policy, these will operate simply as 
caps and are not indicative of any aspiration. 

2. Travel and hospitality While the Committee does not consider it to form part of benefits in the normal usage of that 
term, it has been advised that corporate hospitality, whether paid for by the Company or another, and business travel 
for Directors (and in exceptional circumstances their families) may technically come within the applicable rules, and so 
the Committee expressly reserves the right for the Committee to authorise such activities. 

3. Past obligations In addition to the above elements of remuneration, any commitment made prior to, but due to be 

fulfilled after, the approval and implementation of this Remuneration Policy will be honoured.  

4. Malus/clawback The Committee may apply malus (being the ability to withhold or reduce a payment/vesting) and 

clawback (the ability to reclaim some or all of a payment/vesting) to an award under the annual bonus or PSP where 
there are circumstances which would justify such action. The relevant circumstances where these powers of recovery 
may operate include:
•  the Company materially misstated its financial results for any reason and that misstatement would result or resulted 
either directly or indirectly in an award being granted or vesting to a greater extent than would have been the case 
had that misstatement not been made;

•  the extent to which any performance target and/or any other condition was satisfied was based on an error, or on 
inaccurate or misleading information or assumptions which resulted either directly or indirectly in an award being 
granted or vesting to a greater extent than would have been the case had that error not been made;

•  circumstances arose (or continued to arise) during the vesting period (including any holding period) of an award 

which would have warranted the summary dismissal of the participant; or

•  there is a sufficiently significant impact on the reputation of the Company (including a Company failure) to justify 

the operation of malus or clawback.

Normally, clawback can operate for up to two years following the vesting of an award.

59

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
 
60

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

5. Performance conditions The 

performance-related elements of 
remuneration take into account the 
Group’s risk policies and systems, 
and are designed to align the 
senior executives’ interests with 
those of shareholders. The 
Committee reviews the metrics 
used and targets set for the Group 
Executive Directors and senior 
management (not just the 
Executive Directors) every year,  
in order to ensure that they are 
aligned with the Group’s strategy 
and to ensure an appropriate level 
of consistency. 

6. Differences between the Policy  
in respect of Remuneration for 
Directors and the Policy on 
remuneration for other staff  
While the appropriate benchmarks 
vary by role, the Company seeks  
to apply the philosophy behind  
this policy across the Company as 
a whole. Where the Group’s pay 
policy for Directors differs from  
its pay policies for groups of staff, 
this reflects the appropriate  
market rate position and/or typical 
practice for the relevant roles.  
The Company takes into account 
pay levels, bonus opportunity and 
share awards applied across the 
Group as a whole when setting  
the Executive Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy. 

7. Committee discretions The 

Committee will operate the annual 
bonus plan and PSP according to 
their respective rules and the 
above Remuneration Policy table. 
The Committee retains discretion, 
consistent with market practice,  
in a number or respects, in relation 
to the operation and administration  
of these plans. This discretion 
includes, but is not limited to, the 
following: 
• the selection of participants; 
• the timing of grant of awards; 
• the size of an award/bonus 
opportunity subject to the 
maximum limits set out in the 
Remuneration Policy table and 
the rules of the relevant plan; 

• the determination of 

performance against targets and 
resultant vesting/pay-outs; 

• discretion required when dealing 

with a change of control or 
restructuring of the Company; 
• determination of the treatment of 
leavers based on the rules of the 
relevant plan and the appropriate 
treatment chosen; 

• adjustments required in certain 
circumstances (e.g. rights issue, 
corporate restructuring events 
and special dividends); and 

• the annual review of 

performance measures, 
weightings and targets from  
year to year. 

Committee does receive insights 
from the broader employee 
population via an employee 
engagement group. Accordingly,  
the Committee confirms that the new 
Policy has been designed with due 
regard to the policy for remuneration 
of employees across the Group.

The remuneration policy for other 
employees is based on broadly 
consistent principles as described 
above. Annual salary reviews across 
the Company take into account 
Company performance, relevant  
pay and market conditions and  
salary levels for similar roles in 
comparable companies.

Other members of senior 
management participate in similar 
annual bonus arrangements to the 
Executive Directors, although award 
sizes vary by organisational level. 
Share incentive awards may also be 
granted to a broader population than 
the Executive Directors although  
the award sizes and terms of the 
awards vary. The Company operates 
discretionary bonus schemes for 
eligible groups of employees under 
which a bonus is payable subject to 
the achievement of appropriate 
targets. All eligible employees may 
participate in the Company’s Share 
Save scheme on identical terms.

Statement of consideration of 
shareholders’ views
The Committee considers 
shareholder views received during 
the year and at each AGM, as well  
as guidance from shareholder 
representative bodies more broadly, 
when determining the remuneration 
policy and its implementation.  
The Committee seeks to build an 
active and productive dialogue with 
investors on developments on the 
remuneration aspects of corporate 
governance generally and it will 
consult with major shareholders  
in advance of any material change  
to the structure and/or operation  
of the policy and will seek formal 
shareholder approval for any such 
change if required. Shareholders’ 
views have directly led to the 
Remuneration Committee’s decisions 
on pay in 2021.

In addition, while performance 
measures and targets used in  
the annual bonus plan and PSP  
will generally remain unaltered, if 
events occur which the Committee 
determines would make a different 
or amended target a fairer measure 
of performance, such amended or 
different targets can be set provided 
they are not materially more or less 
difficult to satisfy, having regard to 
the event in question.

Any use of the above discretion 
would, where relevant, be explained 
in the Annual Report on Directors’ 
Remuneration and may, where 
appropriate and practicable, be the 
subject of consultation with the 
Company’s major shareholders.

The Committee may make minor 
amendments to the Remuneration 
Policy set out above for regulatory, 
exchange control, tax or 
administrative purposes or to take 
account of a change in legislation, 
without obtaining shareholder 
approval for that amendment.

External appointments
The Company’s policy on external 
appointments permits an Executive 
Director, subject to the approval of 
the Chairman, to serve as a Non-
Executive Director for normally no 
more than one other organisation 
where this does not conflict with the 
individual’s duties to the Company. 
When an Executive Director takes 
such a role, they may be entitled to 
retain any fees which they earn from 
that appointment.

Statement of consideration of 
employment conditions elsewhere 
in the Company
The Committee receives regular 
updates on overall pay and 
conditions in the Company which 
enables it to take the wider 
workforce remuneration into account 
when setting the policy for executive 
remuneration. Whilst the Committee 
does not consult directly with 
employees as part of the process for 
reviewing executive pay, the 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
 
annual report  
on remuneration

Advisers
FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP 
(‘FIT’), signatories to the Remuneration 
Consultants Group’s Code of Conduct, 
were appointed by the Committee in 
2017. FIT has been retained to provide 
advice to the Committee on matters 
relating to executive remuneration.  
FIT provided no other services to  
the Company and, accordingly, the 
Committee was satisfied that the 
advice provided by FIT was objective 
and independent. FIT’s fees in respect 
of the 2020/21 financial year were 
£68,649 (2019/20: £78,472). FIT’s  
fees are charged on the basis of the 
firm’s standard terms of business for 
advice provided.

Remuneration Committee 
membership
The Remuneration Committee is 
chaired by Margaret Snowdon OBE, 
who is an Independent Non-Executive 
Director. Tom Cross Brown, Alan 
Bannatyne and Sarah Ing are also 
members of the Committee. The 
Committee meets at least twice a year 
and at such other times as the Chair of 
the Committee shall require or as the 
Board may direct. The Committee met 
8 times during the year. All members 
attended every Committee meeting 
throughout the year; the attendance 
table can be found on pages 36 to 37.

Other individuals, such as the Co-Chief 
Executive Officers, the Chief Financial 
Officer, the Chief Operating Officer, the 
HR Director and external professional 
advisers, may be invited to attend for 
all or part of any meeting as and when 
appropriate and necessary.

The purpose of the Committee is to 
establish a formal and transparent 
procedure for developing policy on 
remuneration in accordance with the 
Code and to set the remuneration of 
the Chairman and selected individuals 
with due account taken of all relevant 
factors such as individual and Group 
performance as well as remuneration 
payable by companies of a 
comparable size and complexity. 

The Committee has formal terms 
of reference which can be viewed 
on the Company’s website: 
www. xpsgroup.com

61

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport62

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

Service contracts
The Executive Directors’ service contracts are of indefinite duration. Tom Cross Brown, Alan Bannatyne and Margaret 
Snowdon’s current three-year appointment terms expire on 23 January 2023. Sarah Ing’s current three-year 
appointment term expires on 6 May 2022.

The following (audited) section provides details of how the Directors were paid during the financial year to 31 March 2021.

Salary/fees 
£

Taxable 
benefits1 
£

Bonus2 
£

Long-term 
incentives3 
£

Pension4 
£

Total  
remuneration 
£

Total  
fixed pay 
£

Total 
 variable 
pay 
£ 

Director

Executive Directors
Ben Bramhall

2021
2020

Paul Cuff 

Snehal Shah6

Mike Ainslie7 

2021
2020

2021
2020

2021
2020

Non-Executive Directors
2021
2020

Tom Cross Brown 
– Chair of Board 
& Chair of 
Nomination 
Committee

288,000
288,000

288,000
288,000

243,270
202,207

–
63,000

120,000
120,000

Alan Bannatyne 

– Chair of Audit  
& Risk Committee 
& Senior 
Independent 
Director 

Margaret Snowdon 

– Chair of 
Remuneration 
Committee & 
Designated 
Employee 
Engagement 
NED 

Sarah Ing8  
Chair of 
Sustainability 
Committee

Jonathan Punter9

2021
2020

75,000
75,000

2021
2020

70,000
67,500

2021
2020

60,873
53,199

2021
2020

–
27,143

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

10,813
10,850

10,613
10,850

10,555
8,601

–
2,476

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

293,760
129,600

293,760
129,600

186,102
67,078

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

64,160
120,029

64,160
120,029

–
–

–
31,492

16,275
20,7935

16,275
20,7935

13,930
13,009

–
2,812

673,008
569,272

672,808
569,272

453,857
290,895

–
99,780

315,088
319,643

314,888
319,643

357,920
249,629

357,920
249,629

267,755
223,817

 186,102
67,078

–
68,288

–
31,492

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

120,000
120,000

120,000
120,000

75,000
75,000

75,000
75,000

70,000
67,500

70,000
67,500

60,873
53,199

60,873
53,199

–
27,143

–
27,143

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

Total

2021 1,145,143
2020 1,184,049

31,981
32,777

773,622
326,278

128,320
271,550

46,480
57,407

2,125,546 1,223,604
1,872,061 1,274,233

901,942
597,828

1   Each of the Executive Directors is entitled to a range of benefits, comprising permanent health insurance, life insurance, private medical insurance and car 

allowance. The Non-Executive Directors do not receive other benefits.

2   No element of annual bonus was deferred in respect of bonuses shown. Their current beneficial shareholdings are shown on page 65.
3   The outturn for the July 2018 PSP which vests in July 2021 is expected to be 21.3% and the vesting share price has been estimated at 124.99 pence, based on the 
three-month average share price ending 31 March 2021. The grant share price for the award was 179 pence and accordingly the relevant figures are reflective of a 
decrease of 30.2% in the Company’s share price comparing the award price to the vesting price. Details of the performance measures and targets applicable to the 
2018 PSP are set out on pages 66 to 67. The outturn for the February 2017 PSP which vested on 30 June 2020 was 40.3% and the value has been updated reflecting 
the actual vesting share price of £1.15 and the dividend equivalents. 

4  Pension values shown all relate either to pension contributions or to cash allowances in lieu of pension.
5   Pension values for Ben Bramhall and Paul Cuff for 2020 include backdated shortfall in pension contribution. The shortfall was in respect to associated increase in 
pension contributions following the annual salary increase in April 2018 and reflect what they were entitled to receive in pension contributions. The aggregate 
pension contribution received for 2019 and 2020 equated to 6% of salary over the two-year period.

6   Snehal Shah joined the Company on 28 May 2019. 
7   Mike Ainslie retired from the Board of Directors on 30 June 2019. 
8   Sarah Ing joined the Company on 17 May 2019.
9   Jonathan Punter retired from the Board of Directors on 12 September 2019.

 
 
 
 
2020/21 annual bonus (audited) 
The Executive Directors’ annual bonus targets were set at the beginning of the financial year. The financial targets 
which account for 75% of the annual bonus were set based on Group PBT. The Group PBT targets set are shown below.

£m

Threshold 
(£’000)

Target
 (£’000)

Maximum 
(£’000)

Actual 
(£’000)

Payout
(% of this 
element)

Group Adj. PBT (75% of potential)

24,660

25,215

26,180

25,230

67%

The personal performance goals which account for 25% of the annual bonus were agreed with each Executive Director 
and were based on a range of strategic and other objectives set at the start of the year. The targets were principally 
designed to focus and reward the Executive Directors for accomplishing strategic goals which directly support the 
Company’s strategy. The management of the consequences of Covid-19 became a key task and the same goals were set 
for the Co-CEOs. Details of the measures, to the extent they are not commercially sensitive, are outlined below. 

Ben Bramhall & Paul Cuff – Co-CEOs

Measure 

Target 

Performance

Maintain high levels of employee 
engagement and continue to 
embed a values-based culture

Employee satisfaction 
score above 80%.

Implementation of plan to 
deliver specific technology 
enhancements to improve client 
and staff experience

Progress against 
delivery of 
implementation plan.

Expand client base to 
support longer term growth 
of the business

Achieve net new 
business wins during the 
year with an estimated 
value of 2% of revenue.

Progress CSR plans to improve 
inclusivity / diversity, increase 
social impact and reduce 
environmental footprint

Tangible actions taken 
in relation to inclusivity / 
diversity and to reduce 
footprint / increase 
societal benefit.

2020 employee survey indicates 94% of 
staff agree that XPS is a good company 
to work for. Positive feedback received 
from employees around XPS reaction to 
the pandemic with strong leadership 
shown throughout. Group won awards at 
both the Employee Experience Awards 
and Business Culture Awards (at which it 
was the overall Gold winner).

Implementation of technology strategy 
partially impacted by Covid as ‘in year’ 
focus on successfully developing robust 
infrastructure for 100% remote working. 
Notwithstanding this, further 
developments implemented to Radar 
(which won ‘Actuarial Technology of the 
Year’ for the second consecutive year) 
and success launch of Nexus, a new firm 
wide intranet, driving improved firm 
wide communications. Recruitment of 
experienced CIO to increase capability.

New business pipeline heavily impacted 
by Covid and has remained suppressed 
which has limited opportunities to win 
new clients (notwithstanding some 
significant wins have been achieved). 
Attrition rate has increased slightly.

Launch of Market Force initiative to 
support future pipeline development.

Key focus on supporting Mental Health 
and wellbeing during the year through a 
range of initiatives. Further initiatives 
implemented to improve Diversity & 
Inclusion alongside design of new 
working model which will reduce 
environmental impact. 

Significant input into industry groups – 
for example, protecting members 
from scams.

Assessment

100%

100%

50%

75%

63

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport64

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

Snehal Shah – CFO

Measure 

Target 

Performance

Improve operating cashflow 
conversion

Achieve operating 
cashflow conversation 
above 90%.

Conduct an effective audit 
tender process (a first for the 
listed Group)

Develop strategic forecasting 
model and implement post 
acquisition review process

Tender completed 
during financial year.

Board review of 
projection model  
and post acquisition  
reviews.

OCF conversion of over 90% achieved 
for the full year, despite the pandemic, 
and a strengthened process has been 
put in place around cash collection. 

Process was carried out efficiently and 
effectively with positive feedback from 
the Audit Committee chairman.

Financial projection models have 
been completed and continue to be 
updated to reflect certain strategic 
initiatives. Post acquisition reviews 
carried out for Royal London and Trigon 
acquisitions with positive feedback from 
the Board on the process.

Assessment

100%

100%

75%

Develop and implement 
a revised Investor Relations plan

Increase in Group 
analyst coverage and 
investor base.

Progress made in building relationships 
with new analysts, one of which has 
initiated coverage.

75%

Significant activity in H2 in respect 
of potential new shareholders which has 
results in several new institutions joining 
the shareholder register.

Each objective is measurable (albeit some detail has been removed given the commercially sensitive nature), with target 
achievement levels evidenced by activities and outcomes. The Remuneration Committee then assessed performance 
against each objective in each category on the basis of evidenced outcomes and rated the level of achievement. It also 
takes the view that, although the Executive Directors have personal accountabilities, their performance and activities 
are interconnected. For this reason the Remuneration Committee assessed the performance of the Executive Directors 
collectively and in the round and hence the performance outcome is the same. 

The Committee also notes that the objectives were set before the pandemic and Management’s focus changed to 
address the impact of Covid-19 on the business. In particular, the Group faced a number of operational challenges 
during the year to maintain service levels to clients and staff engagement. XPS reacted well to the challenges, and the 
Executive Directors showed strong leadership. 

In light of the high standards of attainment of each of the Executive Directors, the Remuneration Committee assessed 
that performance against the targets would result in 72% of maximum for this element of bonus to be payable.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Financial performance (% of this element)

Strategic performance (% of this element)

Total performance outcome (% of maximum)

Total performance outcome (% of salary)

Total performance outcome (£)

Weightings

Outcomes

75%

25%

Ben  

Bramhall

67%

72%

68%

Paul  
Cuff

67%

72%

68%

102%

102%

Snehal  
Shah

67%

72%

68%

77%

£293,760

£293,760

£186,102

Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests (audited)
For each Director, the total number of Directors’ interests in shares at 31 March 2021 was as follows:

Director

Number of ordinary shares 
held as at 31 March 2021

Share ownership requirement 

(% of salary)

Share ownership 

requirement met?

Holding as % of March 

2021 salary

Number of ordinary shares 
held as at 31 March 2020

Ben
Bramhall

Paul
Cuff

Snehal
Shah

Tom Cross
Brown

Alan
Bannatyne

Margaret
Snowdon

Sarah  
Ing

1,591,699 

856,763 

–

38,861 

36,594 

30,303 

15,000 

200%

200%

200%

Y

Y

677%

364%

N

–%1

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

1,536,578

796,406

–

38,861

36,594

30,303

15,000

1 

In line with the Directors Remuneration Policy, Snehal Shah will retain 50% of vested shares until he reaches the 200% ownership requirement. Snehal’s awards 
remain unvested at present. 

The shareholdings above include those held by Directors and their respective connected persons. There were no 
changes in the Directors’ interests in shares between 31 March 2021 and 23 June 2021.

Under the share ownership guidelines, the Executive Directors are required to build and maintain a shareholding 
equivalent to at least 200% of salary and are required to maintain a shareholding for a period after leaving the Board.

Awards granted in the year under the PSP (audited)
The following nominal cost option PSP awards were granted in November 2020.

These awards vest in 2023 subject to performance relating to (i) adjusted EPS targets as to 50% of the award, and  
(ii) relative TSR targets as to the remaining 50% of the award. The details of these targets are shown in the ‘Outstanding 
share plan awards’ section on page 66.

Director

Date of grant

Ben Bramhall

30 November 2020

Paul Cuff

30 November 2020

Snehal Shah

30 November 2020

1  Based on the share price of £1.24 on 27 November 2020.

Basis of award  
(% of salary)

Face value of 
awards at grant1

Number of shares 
under award

Date of vesting

150%

150%

125%

£432,000

£432,000

£298,125

348,387

November 2023

348,387

November 2023

240,423

November 2023

65

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport66

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

Outstanding share plan awards (audited)
Details of all outstanding PSP awards made to Executive Directors are set out below:

Director

Date of grant

Exercise 

Interests 
held at 31 
March
2020

Interests
awarded
during the
year

Interests
vested 
during
the year

Interests
lapsed 
during
the year

Interests 
held at 31 
March
2021

Ben 
Bramhall

16 February 2017

0.05p

258,992

26 July 2018

0.05p

241,340

18 September 2019

0.05p

313,043

–

–

–

30 November 2020

0.05p

–

348,387

Paul Cuff

16 February 2017

0.05p

258,992

26 July 2018

0.05p

241,340

18 September 2019

0.05p

313,043

–

–

–

30 November 2020

0.05p

–

348,387

Snehal 
Shah

18 September 2019

0.05p

259,239

–

30 November 2020

0.05p

–

240,423

104, 373

154,619

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

241,340

313,043

348,387

104,373

154,619

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

241,340

313,043

348,387

259,239

240,423

Vesting
Period

June  
2020

July  
2021

September  
2022

November  
2023

June  
2020

July  
2021

September  
2022

November  
2023

September  
2022

November  
2023

Notes:
1  On 24 July 2020, Paul Cuff exercised awards over 104,373 granted on 16 February 2017 and sold 44,016 shares to settle resultant tax and social security obligations. 

The closing share price on the day of exercise was £1.22.

2  On 28 July 2020, Ben Bramhall exercised awards over 104,373 shares granted on 16 February 2017 and sold 49,252 shares to settle resultant tax and social security 

obligations. The closing share price on the day of exercise was £1.22.

3  The highest mid-market price of the Company’s ordinary shares during the year ended 31 March 2021 was £1.395 and the lowest was £1.075. The year-end price  

was £1.225.

Vesting outcomes for the 2018/19 PSP awards (granted in July 2018)
These awards comprise nominal cost options with an exercise price of 0.05p per option and vest in July 2021 subject to 
performance relating to (i) adjusted Earnings per Share (‘EPS’) targets as to 50% of the award, and (ii) Relative Total 
Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) targets as to the remaining 50% of the award. 

The details of the EPS and TSR target ranges and performance against them are shown in the table below.

Diluted Adjusted EPS for the three-year period to the end of FY 2020/21

Portion of award vesting

Compound annual growth in EPS (‘CAG‘) of less than 8% above CPI 0%

CAG of 8% above CPI

25%

CAG between 8% and 18% above CPI

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

CAG of 18% or more above CPI

Actual performance1:
CAG of 10.3% above CPI

100%

42.5%

1  To ensure a like-for-like comparison, the impact on EPS of IFRS 16 and of the use of shares held by the EBT following the IPO to settle bonus payments has been 

neutralised to ensure the outturn is an accurate reflection of operational performance.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
XPS Pensions Group’s TSR ranking vs a Comparator Group of Companies

Portion of award vesting

Below median

Median

0%

25%

Between median and upper quartile

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

Upper quartile

Actual performance2:
Below median

100%

0%

The TSR Comparator Group consists of the constituents of the FTSE Small Cap Index (excluding investment trusts) at 
the start of the performance period.

2  Based on performance to the end of March. This is an estimate as TSR performance will be measured to the third anniversary of the date of grant to 25th July 2021.

Based on the above the expected percentage of the total award vesting is 21.3% of maximum. Details of the shares 
under award and their estimated value (based on the three-month average share price at 31 March 2021 of 124.99 pence 
per share) is as follows:

Executive

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

1  Based on the three-month average share price to 31 March 2021.

The awards also receive the value of dividend equivalents.

Maximum 
number of 
shares

Number 
of shares
 to vest

Number 
of shares 
to lapse

241,340

 51,333

190,007

241,340

 51,333

190,007

Estimated
 value 
vesting  

£1

64,160

64,160

2019/20 PSP Awards (granted in September 2019)
These awards comprise nominal cost options with an exercise price of 0.05p per option and vest in 2022 subject to 
performance relating to (i) adjusted Earnings per Share (‘EPS’) targets as to 50% of the award, and (ii) Relative Total 
Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) targets as to the remaining 50% of the award. The EPS target range was set considering 
both the internal and external expectations for EPS performance over the next three years. The details of the EPS and 
TSR target ranges are shown in the table below.

Diluted Adjusted EPS1 for the three-year period to the end of FY 2021/22

Portion of award vesting

Compound annual growth in EPS (‘CAG‘) of less than 3% above CPI 0%

CAG of 3% above CPI

25%

CAG between 3% and 7% above CPI

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

CAG of 7% or more above CPI

100%

1  Measured by normalising to allow for the variance in costs due to the discount received by the Group in respect the Transitional Services Agreement and the use of 

shares held by the EBT to settle bonus payments, to ensure the outturn is an accurate reflection of operational performance.

XPS Pensions Group’s TSR ranking vs a Comparator Group2 of Companies

Portion of award vesting

Below median

Median

0%

25%

Between median and upper quartile

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

Upper quartile

100%

2  The TSR Comparator Group consists of the constituents of the FTSE Small Cap Index (excluding investment trusts) at the start of the performance period.

67

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport68

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

2020/21 PSP Awards (granted in November 2020)
These awards comprise nominal cost options with an exercise price of 0.05p per option and vest in 2023 subject to 
performance relating to (i) adjusted Earnings per Share (‘EPS’) targets as to 50% of the award, and (ii) Relative Total 
Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) targets as to the remaining 50% of the award. The EPS target range was set considering 
both the internal and external expectations for EPS performance over the next three years. The details of the EPS and 
TSR target ranges are shown in the table below.

PLEASE NOTE THIS CHART HAD 
TO BE TRACED SEE KEY LAYER

Diluted Adjusted EPS1 for the three-year period to the end of FY 2022/23

Portion of award vesting

Compound annual growth in EPS (‘CAG‘) of less than 3% above CPI 0%

CAG of 3% above CPI

25%

CAG between 3% and 7% above CPI

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

CAG of 7% or more above CPI

100%

1   Measured by normalising to allow for the use of shares held by the EBT to settle bonus payments and the impact of IFRS 16, to ensure the outturn is an accurate 

reflection of operational performance.

XPS Pensions Group’s TSR ranking vs a Comparator Group2 of Companies

Portion of award vesting

Below median

Median

0%

25%

Between median and upper quartile

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

Upper quartile

100%

2  The TSR Comparator Group consists of the constituents of the FTSE Small Cap Index (excluding investment trusts) at the start of the performance period.

External Board appointments
The Executive Directors did not hold any external directorships during the year. The approved Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy makes provision for them to retain any fees for one appointment. 

Payments to past Directors (audited)
There were no payments to past Directors in the financial year 2020/21 (2019/20: nil). 

Payments for loss of office (audited)
No payments were made to any Director in respect of loss of office in the financial year 2020/21 (2019/20: nil).

Review of past performance and CEO remuneration table (unaudited)
The graph below shows the TSR of the Company and the FTSE Small Cap Index (excluding investment trusts) over the 
period from Admission to 31 March 2021. This is considered an appropriate comparator for XPS Pensions Group which is 
a constituent of the FTSE Small Cap Index. 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Total shareholder return
Source: Refinitiv Datastream

XPS Pensions Group PLC
FTSE Small Cap Excl. Investment Trusts

)
0
0
1
o
t
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(
n
r
u
t
e
R
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

l

l

a
t
o
T

140

130

120

110

100

90

80

70

31 Mar
2017

15 Feb 
2017

31 Mar
2018

31 Mar
2019

31 Mar
2020

31 Mar
2021

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The table below shows the CEOs’ single total figure remuneration since Admission and the level (as a percentage of 
maximum award) of payouts under the incentive plans:

2021

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

2020

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

2019

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

2018

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

2017

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

Single total
figure of
remuneration

Annual bonus
payout as %
of maximum

Long-term
incentive
vesting rates
as % of
maximum

£673,008

£672,808 

£569,272

£569,272

£362,803

£362,803

£546,138

£545,724

£286,882

£4,179,695

68%

68%

30%2

30%2

12%3

12%3

79%

79%

31%

31%

21.3%1

21.3%1

40.3%

40.3%

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

1  The vesting rate relates to the July 2018 award that is due to vest in July 2021 and is, in part based on estimated vesting levels at 31 March 2021.
2  The bonus was reduced with the agreement of the Co-CEOs from the formulaic outcome of 50%.
3  The bonus was reduced with the agreement of the Co-CEOs from the formulaic outcome of 54%.

Percentage change in remuneration of Directors and Employees (unaudited)
The table below presents the year-on-year % change in remuneration received by each Director, compared with the 
change in remuneration received by all XPS Pensions Group staff.

Ben Bramhall

Paul Cuff

Snehal Shah1

Tom Cross Brown

Alan Bannatyne

Margaret Snowdon

Sarah Ing2

All UK employees

Percentage change in remuneration  
from 31/03/2020 to 31/03/2021

Percentage 
change in 
base salary %

Percentage 
change in 
benefits %

Percentage 
change in 
bonus %

0%

0%

20%

0%

0%

4%

14%

3.2%

–

-2%

23%

–

–

–

–

1%

127%

127%

177%

–

–

–

–

68%

1  Snehal Shah was appointed as a Director on 28 May 2019; accordingly the percentage difference shown represents a comparison between a full year (2021) and a 

part year (2020).

2  Sarah Ing was appointed as Non-Executive Director on 17 May 2019; accordingly the percentage difference shown represents a comparison between a full year 

(2021) and a part year (2020).

CEO pay 
The table below sets out the pay ratios for the Group Chief Executives in relation to the equivalent pay for the lower 
quartile, median and upper quartile employees (calculated on a full-time basis). 

Year

2021

Method

Option A

2020

Option A

Total pay ratio

Total pay ratio

25th 
percentile  
pay ratio

27:1

24:1

Median  

pay ratio

19:1

13:1

75th 
percentile  
pay ratio

13:1

11:1

Notes:
1  The Company determined the remuneration figures at each quartile with reference to a date of 31 March 2021.
2  The Group used calculation option A as this is widely regarded as the method resulting in the most robust analysis.
3  The calculation is based on full-time equivalent salary calculated on the same basis as the single figure table.
4  This year the ratios have increased compared to the previous year, this reflects how the single figures for the Group Chief Executives have increased year on year, 

influenced by the reduction in bonus payment from the formulaic outcome last year.

5  The Committee has reviewed the employee data and believes the median pay ratio to be consistent with the pay, reward and progression policies for the  

Company’s UK employees over the period.

69

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport70

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

The total pay and benefits and the salary component of total pay and benefits for the employee at each of the 25th 
percentile, the median and the 75th percentile are shown below:

£

Salary 

Total pay and benefits

25th 
percentile

Median

75th 
percentile

£23,345

£32,500

£46,586

£25,140

£35,401

£52,370

Relative importance of spend on pay (unaudited)
The table below details the change in total staff pay between financial years 2019/20 and 2020/21 as detailed in  
Note 9 of the Financial Statements, compared with distributions to shareholders by way of dividend, share buy backs  
or any other significant distributions or payments. These figures have been calculated in line with those in the audited 
Financial Statements.

Total gross staff pay

Distributions to shareholders

2020/21

2019/20

63,379

13,480

56,077

13,412

%
change 

13

1

Statement of shareholder voting
The table below shows the outcome of the binding vote on the Directors’ Remuneration Policy and the advisory vote on 
the 2019/20 Directors’ Remuneration Report at the Annual General Meeting held on 8 September 2020.

AGM resolution

Directors’ Remuneration Policy 

Directors’ Remuneration Report 

Votes for

%

Votes 
against

Votes 
withheld

160,263,927

96.06

6,575,827

3,625

165,126,508

99.98

31,764

1,685,107

Implementation of Policy for 2021/22 (unaudited information)
This section provides an overview of how the Committee is proposing to implement the Remuneration Policy in the year 
ending 31 March 2022.

Base salary
Base salaries are as follows with effect from 1 April 2021. The next annual review will be effective from 1 April 2022 and it 
is the intention to increase salaries by 6%, subject to continuing good corporate and individual performance.

• Ben Bramhall: £313,920
• Paul Cuff: £313,920
• Snehal Shah: £265,160

Benefits in kind
Benefits will be paid in line with the Directors’ Remuneration Policy. Details of the benefits received by Executive 
Directors are set out in the single figure table on page 62. There is no intention to introduce additional benefits 
in 2021/22.

Pension
Contribution rates are currently 6% of base salary. Contributions may be made as cash supplements in full or in part. 
These contributions are in line with those for the majority of employees in the Group. 

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Annual bonus
Bonus maxima of 150% of salary will be applied for the Co-Chief Executive Officers and 112.5% for the Chief 
Financial Officer.

The weightings are as follows: 75% of the bonus will be payable by reference to performance based on Adjusted PBT, 
with performance against personal/strategic targets determining the extent to which the remaining 25% of the overall 
bonus opportunity is payable.

In addition:
• no bonus will be payable unless the Committee is satisfied that the Company’s underlying performance warrants it; and
• as set out in the Policy table, bonus payments will also be subject to the Committee considering that the proposed 
bonus amounts, calculated by reference to performance against the targets, appropriately reflect the Company’s 
overall performance and shareholders’ experience. If the Committee does not believe this to be the case, it may 
adjust the bonus outturn accordingly. 

Owing to the Board’s concerns about commercial sensitivity, we do not believe it is in shareholders’ interests to disclose 
any further details of these targets on a prospective basis. However, the Company is committed to adhering to 
principles of transparency and will, provided disclosure of targets is not deemed to be commercially sensitive, make 
appropriate and relevant levels of disclosure of bonus targets and performance against these targets for the 2021/22 
bonus in next year’s report. The targets will be set to ensure both consistency and fairness to all stakeholders.

PSP awards
It is intended that the PSP awards will be made in 2021/22. There are two performance criteria and they are based on 
EPS and relative Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) performance. In 2021 the vesting of three-quarters of the shares 
under award will be subject to EPS performance and the remaining quarter subject to relative Total Shareholder Return.
The awards will normally vest three years after grant based upon performance. The details of the EPS and TSR target 
ranges are shown in the table below.

Diluted Adjusted EPS for the three-year period to the end of FY 2023/24

Portion of award vesting

Compound annual growth in EPS (‘CAG‘) of less than 3% above CPI 0%

CAG of 3% above CPI

25%

CAG between 3% and 7% above CPI

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

CAG of 7% or more above CPI

100%

The EPS target range was set considering both the internal and external expectations for EPS performance over the 
next three years

XPS Pensions Group’s TSR ranking vs a Comparator Group of Companies

Portion of award vesting

Below median

Median

0%

25%

Between median and upper quartile

Between 25% and 100% on a straight-line basis

Upper quartile

100%

The TSR Comparator Group consists of the constituents of the FTSE Small Cap Index (excluding investment trusts) at 
the start of the performance period.

The award levels will be no more than 150% of salary for the Co-CEOs and 125% for the CFO.

71

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport72

Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

Minimum Shareholding 
Requirement
To align the interests of Executive 
Directors with those of shareholders, 
they are required to build and 
maintain significant holdings of 
shares in the Group over time. 
The minimum shareholding 
requirement for Executive Directors 
are 200% of base salary for the 
Co-CEOs and for the CFO.

In addition, Executive Directors will  
be required to maintain their full 
minimum shareholding requirement 
for one year post-cessation of 
employment, and hold 50% of the 
requirement for a second year.

The Chairman’s and the 
Non- Executive Directors’ Fees
Tom Cross Brown receives an 
annual fee of £120,000 for his role 
as Board Chairman.

The Non-Executive Directors are 
entitled to a fee of £60,000 p.a.,  
with an additional fee of £10,000 p.a. 
for the Chair of the Audit & Risk 
Committee and £5,000 p.a. for each 
of the Senior Independent Director, 
Chair of the Remuneration Committee, 
Chair of the Sustainability Committee 
and to the designated Non-Executive 
Director for workforce engagement. 

This report was reviewed and 
approved by the Board of Directors 
on 23 June 2021 and was signed on 
its behalf by:

Margaret Snowdon OBE
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
23 June 2021

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report

The Directors present their Annual Report on the  
activities of XPS Pensions Group plc (the ‘Group’),  
together with the audited financial statements for  
the year ended 31 March 2021. 

The Governance section on pages 34 
to 72 forms part of this Directors’ 
Report. Other requisite components 
of this report are set out elsewhere in 
this Annual Report.

The Strategic Report provides 
information relating to the Group’s 
activities, its business and strategy, 
engagement with stakeholders, the 
principal risks and uncertainties faced 
by the business and environmental 
and employee matters. These 
sections, together with the Corporate 
Governance and the Directors’ 
Remuneration Reports provide an 
overview of the Group and give an 
indication of future developments in 
the Group’s business, so providing a 
balanced assessment of the Group’s 
position and prospects. These reports 
and this Directors’ Report have been 
drawn up and presented in accordance 
with, and in reliance upon, applicable 
English company law and any liability 
of the Directors in connection with 
such reports shall be subject to the 
limitations and restrictions provided 
by such law.

XPS Pensions Group plc is a member 
of the FTSE All-Share Index, trading 
under the ticker symbol XAF.

The table below details where certain 
other information, which forms part  
of the Directors’ Report, can be found 
within this Annual Report:

Going concern
Please refer to the going concern 
statement in the Strategic Report on 
page 27 and the viability statement on 
page 33 for details on the assessment 
carried out by the Directors with 
regards to going concern.

Results and dividend
The Group’s audited financial 
statements for the year ended 
31 March 2021 are set out on pages 84 
to 121 and the Company’s audited 
financial statements are set out on 
pages 122 to 127. The Group’s profit 
after taxation for the year ended 
31 March 2021 was £9.0 million (2020: 
7.4 million).

An interim dividend of 2.3p per  
ordinary share (2020: 2.3p) was paid 
on 4 February 2021. The Directors 
recommend a final dividend for the  
year of 4.4p per ordinary share (2020: 
4.3p) to be paid on 23 September 2021 
to shareholders on the register on 
27 August 2021. Further information 
regarding dividend policy and 
payments can be found in the Financial 
Review on page 26 and in Note 35 to 
the Financial Statements on page 121.

Post balance sheet events
There have been no significant post 
balance sheet events to report since 
31 March 2021.

Directors 
The current Directors of the Company, 
with summaries of their key skills 
and experience, are set out in the 

Governance section on pages 36 to 
to 38. Directors on the Board during 
the year and up to the date of this 
report are as follows:

Tom Cross Brown
Ben Bramhall
Paul Cuff
Snehal Shah 
Alan Bannatyne
Margaret Snowdon, OBE
Sarah Ing 

Details of the Directors’ service 
contracts are shown in the Report 
of the Remuneration Committee on 
page 62.

Details of share options granted to 
Directors and the interests of the 
Directors in the ordinary shares of 
the Company are set out in the 
Remuneration Report on pages  
65 to 68. 

In accordance with its Articles of 
Association, the Company made 
qualifying third-party indemnity 
provisions for the benefit of its 
Directors against any liability that 
attaches to them in defending 
proceedings brought against them, to 
the extent permitted by company law, 
which were in place throughout the 
year and remain in force at the date of 
this report. In addition, Directors’ and 
Officers’ liability insurance cover was 
maintained throughout the year at the 
Company’s expense and remains in 
force at the date of this report. 

Information

Location within Annual Report

Likely future developments in the business of the Company Strategic Report (pages 18 to 19)

Equality and diversity

Co-Chief Executive Officers’ Report (pages 12 to 15) 

Employee involvement

Directors’ share interests

Co-Chief Executive Officers’ Report (pages 14 to 15),  
s172 Statement (pages 28 to 29) and Corporate 
Governance Report (page 43)

Directors’ Remuneration Report (page 65)

Emissions and energy consumption

Strategic Report (page 20)

Financial risk management objectives and policies

Note 2 to the financial statements (page 97)

Directors’ regard to foster business relationships

Strategic Report (pages 28 to 29)

73

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport74

Directors’ Report (continued)

Capital structure
The Company’s issued ordinary share 
capital and total voting rights at 
31 March 2021 and the date of this 
report were respectively 205,116,523 
and 205,151,471 ordinary shares (each 
with a par value of 0.05p and all fully 
paid). There were no ordinary shares 
held in treasury. 2,011,864 ordinary 
shares were held in the Employee 
Benefit Trust as at 31 March 2021 and 
1,895,659 were held as at the date  
of this report. Further details of the 
Company’s issued share capital are 
given in Note 27 of the Financial 
Statements on page 113. 

The Company’s ordinary shares rank 
pari passu in all respects with each 
other, including for voting purposes 
and for all dividends. Each share 
carries the right to one vote at general 
meetings of the Company. Further 
information on the voting and other 
rights of shareholders, including 
deadlines for exercising voting rights, 
are set out in the Company’s Articles 
of Association and in the explanatory 
notes that accompany the Notice of 
the Annual General Meeting, which 
are available on the Company’s 
website at www.xpsgroup.com.

Restrictions on shares
The Company’s ordinary shares are 
freely transferable and there are no 
restrictions on the size of a holding. 
Transfers of shares are governed by the 
provisions of the Articles of Association 
and prevailing legislation. The ordinary 
shares are not redeemable; however, 
the Company may purchase any of the 
ordinary shares, subject to prevailing 
legislation and the requirements of the 
Listing Rules.

The Directors are not aware of any 
agreements between holders of the 
Company’s shares that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of securities 
or on voting rights. Awards of shares 
under the Company’s Performance 
Share Plan incentive arrangement are 
subject to restrictions on the transfer 
of shares prior to vesting. 

As at the date of this report, the 
Trustee of the Group’s Employee 
Benefit Trust holds 1,895,659 ordinary 
shares in the Company but has waived 
its entitlement to dividends and does 
not seek to exercise the voting rights 
on those shares.

Major interests in shares
The table at the bottom of the page 
shows the interests in shares (whether 
directly or indirectly held) notified  
to the Company in accordance with 
Chapter 5 of the Disclosure Guidance 
and Transparency Rules as at  
31 March 2021 and 31 May 2021 (being 
the latest practicable date prior to 
publication of this Annual Report).

Appointment and retirement 
of Directors
The Board may from time to time 
appoint one or more additional 
Directors so long as the total number 
of Directors does not exceed the limit 
of 12 prescribed in the Articles of 
Association. Any person so appointed 
will retire at the next Annual General 
Meeting and then be eligible for 
re-election. The UK Corporate 
Governance Code recommends  
that all Directors be subject to  
annual re-election by shareholders. 
Therefore, being eligible, all Directors 
will offer themselves for re-election at 
the 2021 Annual General Meeting.

Powers of Directors
The business of the Company shall be 
managed by the Directors, who may 
exercise all powers of the Company, 
subject to legislation, the provisions  
of the Articles of Association and any 
directions given by special resolution. 
The Articles of Association contain 
specific provisions governing the 
Company’s power to borrow money 
and also provide the powers to issue 
shares and to make purchases of its 
own shares. In accordance with the 
authorities granted at the 2020 
Annual General Meeting, the Directors 
are authorised, within certain limits,  
to allot shares or grant rights to 
subscribe for shares in the Company 
and to make market purchases of the 
Company’s own shares representing 
up to 10% of its share capital at that 
time. Details of the proposed renewal 
of authorities of the Directors are set 
out in the Notice of the 2021 Annual 
General Meeting.

Political donations 
No political contributions were made, 
or political expenditure incurred, by 
the Company and its subsidiaries 
during the year (2020: £nil).

Provisions on change of control
The Company is subject to a change 
of control provision in the following 
significant agreement:

The Company’s £80 million agreement 
with HSBC Bank plc and the Bank  
of Ireland in multicurrency revolving 
facilities, with a further uncommitted 
facility of up to £20 million, includes  
a customary provision for a lending 
counterparty to amend, alter or  
cancel the relevant commitment to 
the Group following a change of 
control of the Company.

The Company does not have 
agreements with any Director or 
employee that would provide specific 
compensation for loss of office  
or employment resulting from a 
takeover, except that provisions of the 
Company’s Performance Share Plan 
incentive arrangement may cause 
awards to vest on a takeover. 

Articles of Association 
A copy of the full Articles of 
Association are available on the 
Company’s website. The Company’s 
Articles of Association may only be 
amended by a special resolution of 
shareholders in a general meeting.

Auditors and disclosure of 
information to the Auditors
In accordance with section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006, each of the 
Directors who were members of the 
Board at the date of the approval of 
this report confirms that:
• So far as the Director is aware, there 
is no relevant audit information of 
which the Company’s auditors are 
unaware; and

• The Director has taken all steps  

that they ought to have taken as a 
Director to make themselves aware 
of any relevant audit information 
and to establish that the Company’s 
Auditors are aware of that 
information.

The Company’s Auditor, BDO LLP, has 
expressed its willingness to continue 
in office and the Board has agreed, 
based on the recommendation of the 
Audit and Risk Committee, that a 
resolution for their reappointment will 
be proposed at the forthcoming 
Annual General Meeting.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Annual General Meeting
Details of the forthcoming Annual General Meeting are given in the Governance Report on page 43. 

Shareholder

Punter Southall Group Limited
Gresham House
Fidelity International
Schroder Investment Management
Unicorn Asset Management
AXA Investment Managers
Premier Miton Investors 

At 31 March 2021

At 31 May 2021

Number of 
ordinary 
shares 

Percentage 
of total 
voting rights

Number of 
ordinary 
shares 

Percentage 
of total 
voting rights

22,692,543
22,240,765
16,415,242
16,226,175
12,650,000
11,534,039
11,332,320

11.06
10.84
8.00
7.91
6.17
5.62
5.52

22,692,543
25,005,765
16,481,065
15,486,140
9,300,000
10,284,039
12,006,261

11.06
12.19
8.03
7.55
4.53
5.01
5.85

Listing Rule (‘LR’) disclosures
For the purposes of LR 9.8.4CR, the information required to be disclosed by LR 9.8.4R can be found in the 
following locations:

Item

Interest capitalised

Location

None

Publication of unaudited financial information

Not applicable

Details of long-term incentive schemes

Details of the Company’s long-term incentive scheme 
can be found in the Remuneration Committee Report 
on page 54

Waiver of emoluments by a Director

Waiver of future emoluments by a Director

Non-pre-emptive issues of equity for cash

Non-pre-emptive issues of equity for cash in relation to major 
subsidiary undertakings

None

None

Not applicable

Not applicable

Contracts of significance in which a Director is or was interested

None

Provision of services by a controlling shareholder

Not applicable

Shareholder waiver of dividend for the year and future dividends Dividend waiver by the Trustee of the Group’s 

Employee Benefit Trust – see page 74 of this report

Agreements with controlling shareholder

Not applicable

The Directors’ Report was approved by the Board of Directors of XPS Pensions Group plc.

By order of the Board:

Snehal Shah
Chief Financial Officer
23 June 2021

75

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReportResponsibility statement
The Directors confirm that to the best 
of their knowledge:
• The Group Financial Statements, 
prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by 
the European Union and Article 4 of 
the IAS Regulation, give a true and 
fair view of the assets, liabilities, 
financial position and profit or loss 
of the Group; 

• The Annual Report includes a fair 
review of the development and 
performance of the business and 
the financial position of the Group 
and the Parent Company as a 
whole; and

• The Strategic Report includes a fair 
review of the development and 
performance of the business and 
the position of the Company and 
the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, 
together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties 
that they face.

Snehal Shah
Chief Financial Officer
23 June 2021

76

Directors’ Responsibility Statement

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and 
the Group Financial Statements in 
accordance with applicable laws 
and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare Financial Statements for each 
financial year. Under that law the 
Directors are required to prepare the 
Group Financial Statements and have 
elected to prepare the Company 
Financial Statements in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) adopted pursuant 
to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it 
applies to the European Union. Under 
company law the Directors must not 
approve the Financial Statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give 
a true and fair view of the state of 
affairs of the Group and Company and 
of the profit or loss for the Group and 
Company for that period. In preparing 
these Financial Statements, the 
Directors are required to:
• Select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;
• Make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable 
and prudent;

• State whether they have been 

prepared in accordance with IFRSs 
adopted pursuant to Regulation EC 
1606/2002 as it applies to the 
European Union, subject to any 
material departures disclosed and 
explained in the financial 
statements;

• Prepare the financial statements 
on the going concern basis unless 
it is inappropriate to presume that 
the Company will continue in 
business; and

• Prepare a Directors’ Report, a 

Strategic Report and Directors’ 
Remuneration Report which comply 
with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

The Directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting records 
that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy at 
any time the financial position of the 
Company and enable them to ensure 
that the Financial Statements comply 
with the Companies Act 2006 and,  
as regards the Group Financial 
Statements, Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation. They are also responsible 
for safeguarding the assets of the 
Company and hence for taking 
reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and 
other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate and financial information 
included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the 
preparation and dissemination of 
Financial Statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Statement of the Directors in 
respect of the Annual Report
As required by the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, the Directors 
confirm that they consider that the 
Annual Report, taken as a whole, is 
fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
position and performance, business 
model and strategy. When arriving at 
this position the Board was assisted 
by a number of processes, including 
the following:
• The Annual Report is drafted by 
appropriate senior management 
with overall coordination by Internal 
Communications and Company 
Secretarial teams to ensure 
consistency across sections;

• An extensive verification process 

is undertaken to ensure 
factual accuracy;

• Comprehensive reviews of drafts of 
the Annual Report are undertaken 
by members of the Executive Board 
and senior management team; and

• The final draft is reviewed by the 

Audit and Risk Committee prior to 
consideration by the Board.

 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor’s Report to the  
members of XPS Pensions Group plc

Opinion on the financial statements
In our opinion:
• the financial statements give a 

true and fair view of the state of 
the Group’s and of the Parent 
Company’s affairs as at 31 March 
2021 and of the Group’s profit for 
the year then ended;

• the Group financial statements 
have been properly prepared in 
accordance with international 
accounting standards in conformity 
with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006;

• the Group financial statements 
have been properly prepared in 
accordance with international 
financial reporting standards 
adopted pursuant to Regulation 
(EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies in 
the European Union;

• the Parent Company financial 

statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with 
international accounting standards 
in conformity with the requirements 
of the Companies Act 2006 and as 
applied in accordance with the 
provisions of the Companies Act 
2006; and

• the financial statements have been 
prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006; and, as regards the 
Group financial statements, Article 
4 of the IAS Regulation.

We have audited the financial 
statements of XPS Pensions Group plc 
(the ‘Parent Company’) and its 
subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) for the year 
ended 31 March 2021 which comprise 
the Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income, the 
Consolidated Statement of Financial 
Position, the Consolidated Statement 
of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated 
Statement of Cash Flows, the 
Statement of Financial Position – 
Company, the Statement of Changes 
in Equity – Company, the Statement 
of Cash Flows – Company, and notes 
to the financial statements, including 
a summary of significant accounting 
policies. The financial reporting 
framework that has been applied in 
their preparation is applicable law and 
international accounting standards  
in conformity with the requirements  
of the Companies Act 2006 and 
international financial reporting 
standards adopted pursuant to 
Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as  
it applies in the European Union,  

and as regards the Parent Company 
financial statements, as applied in 
accordance with the provisions of 
the Companies Act 2006.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance 
with International Standards on 
Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and 
applicable law. Our responsibilities 
under those standards are  
further described in the Auditor’s 
responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements section of our 
report. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is sufficient 
and appropriate to provide a basis  
for our opinion. Our audit opinion is 
consistent with the additional report 
to the Audit Committee.

Independence
Following the recommendation of 
the Audit Committee, we were 
reappointed by the shareholders  
at the AGM on 8 September 2020  
to audit the financial statements  
for the year ended 31 March 2021  
and subsequent financial periods. 
The period of total uninterrupted 
engagement including retenders 
and reappointments is eight years, 
covering the years ending 31 March 
2014 to 31 March 2021. We remain 
independent of the Group and the 
Parent Company in accordance with 
the ethical requirements that are 
relevant to our audit of the financial 
statements in the UK, including the 
FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied 
to listed public interest entities, and 
we have fulfilled our other ethical 
responsibilities in accordance with 
these requirements. The non-audit 
services prohibited by that standard 
were not provided to the Group or 
the Parent Company. 

Conclusions relating  
to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, 
we have concluded that the Directors’ 
use of the going concern basis of 
accounting in the preparation of the 
financial statements is appropriate. 

Due to the level of judgement applied 
by management in their going 
concern assessment as a result of 
the ongoing Covid-19 pandemic, 
we considered going concern to be 
a key audit matter.

Our evaluation of the Directors’ 
assessment of the Group’s and the 
Parent Company’s ability to continue 

to adopt the going concern basis of 
accounting and in response to the Key 
Audit Matter included:
• Assessing the Directors’ going 

concern assessment and forecasts, 
including the reasonableness of their 
assumptions applied and reverse 
stress case sensitivities using our 
knowledge of the business;

• Assessing the reasonableness of 

underlying forecast model against 
the Directors’ historical forecast 
accuracy, including an assessment 
of the period to May 2021 actuals 
against budget;

• Reviewing the terms and period of 
the Group’s bank facility agreement 
and consideration of the sufficiency 
of the facility available;

• Considering the Group’s compliance 
with banking covenants and related 
headroom in light of the Directors’ 
reverse stress test assessment;

• Considering the options available to 
management to mitigate the impact 
of reverse stress test scenarios and 
whether such actions are within 
their control;

• Considering the adequacy of  
the disclosures in the financial 
statements against the 
requirements of the accounting 
standards and consistency of the 
disclosure and the forecasts and 
reverse stress test assessment 
prepared by the Directors.

Based on the work we have performed, 
we have not identified any material 
uncertainties relating to events 
or conditions that, individually or 
collectively, may cast significant 
doubt on the Group and the Parent 
Company’s ability to continue as a 
going concern for a period of at least 
twelve months from when the financial 
statements are authorised for issue. 

In relation to the Parent Company’s 
reporting on how it has applied 
the UK Corporate Governance Code, 
we have nothing material to add 
or draw attention to in relation to 
the Directors’ statement in the 
financial statements about whether 
the Directors considered it 
appropriate to adopt the going 
concern basis of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the 
responsibilities of the Directors 
with respect to going concern 
are described in the relevant 
sections of this report.

77

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport78

Independent Auditor’s Report to the  
members of XPS Pensions Group plc (continued)

Overview

Coverage

Key audit matters

100% (2020: 100%) of Group profit before tax
100% (2020: 100%) of Group revenue
100% (2020: 100%) of Group total assets

Revenue recognition

Going concern relating to Coronavirus

2021

2020

Materiality

Group financial statements as a whole
£568,000 (2020:£546,000) based on 5% (2020: 5%) of profit before tax

An overview of the scope of our audit
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment, including the Group’s 
system of internal control, and assessing the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements. We also 
addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, including assessing whether there was evidence of bias 
by the Directors that may have represented a risk of material misstatement.

The Group comprises the Parent Company, seven trading subsidiaries, all of which are considered to be significant 
components, and five intermediate holding companies all based in the United Kingdom, together with a Jersey based 
trust company controlled by the Parent Company, which contains the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust. Full scope 
audits of all entities were carried out by the Group audit team given the statutory audit requirements for 
all components.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the 
financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement 
(whether or not due to fraud) that we identified, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit 
strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit, and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were 
addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we 
do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. In addition to the matter described in the Conclusions relating to 
going concern section, we have determined the matter described below to be the key audit matter to be communicated 
in our report.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Key audit matter 

How the scope of our audit addressed the key audit matter

Revenue recognition
The accounting 
policy for revenue 
is disclosed in 
note 1 of the 
consolidated 
financial 
statements.

The segmental 
information 
relating to Group 
revenue is 
disclosed in  
note 7 to the 
consolidated 
financial 
statements.

The Group generates revenue from 
pension advisory, administration and 
investment consulting services as well as 
providing SSAS and SIPP services. 

Accounting standards require the 
identification of the separate performance 
obligations embedded in a contract, and 
the allocation of the transaction price to 
these performance obligations. Revenue 
is only recognised when performance 
obligations have been met. Identification 
of the separate performance obligations 
and price allocation is complex and 
involves judgement. There is a risk that 
incorrect revenue is recognised due to the 
judgements involved in the application of 
the applicable accounting standards.

The significant revenue risk revolves 
around the existence and valuation of 
revenue residing within accrued income 
at the year-end for the Pensions, Advisory 
and Consulting streams. Billing occurs 
monthly, quarterly, or in the case of SSAS 
services, annually.

Services may be billed in arrears, as in the 
case of pensions advisory work noted 
above, or in advance as is the case with 
SSAS revenue. The manual nature of the 
SSAS deferral creates a significant risk in 
the calculation of the deferred income 
element of this revenue.

Whilst not considered part of the 
significant risk, completeness of 
revenue is considered, particularly 
where revenue is captured based on 
the timecard system. There is a risk that 
incomplete revenue is recorded within 
the accounting system.

We identified the Group’s revenue streams and 
tested that the related revenue recognition policy  
is in accordance with the requirements of the 
applicable accounting standards. 

We reviewed revenue transactions to identify 
transactions which are outside of the normal 
revenue cycle. We then agreed a sample of any such 
transactions to underlying documentation to gain an 
understanding of the transaction and check that the 
related revenue had been appropriately recognised. 

We tested a sample of revenue transactions for  
each material income stream by agreeing back to 
timecard data, invoice, and receipt of payment to 
check the existence of revenue and that it was 
accurately recorded. 

We agreed a sample of accrued income to pre 
year-end timecard data to check existence of 
revenue. We tested the recoverability of a sample  
of accrued income through to its subsequent  
billing and cash receipt. For any unpaid items we 
considered the recoverability of these by reference 
to customers’ payment trends historically. 

We tested deferred income on a sample basis by 
re-calculating deferrals based on invoice amounts 
and periods to which they relate, agreeing 
consistency of these period year on year, agreeing 
these to supporting documentation and reviewing 
SSAS income for revenue deferrals not made. 

Where contracts exist, for a sample we have 
checked that revenue is being recognised in 
accordance with the terms of the contract as 
well as the requirements of applicable 
accounting standards. 

We tested the completeness of timecards recorded 
within the timecard system and the subsequent 
recognition of related revenue by reconciling the 
timecards recorded to the amounts billed and 
written off, agreeing any material exceptions noted 
to underlying support. In addition, completeness  
of timecards is addressed through our data 
analytics testing by identifying outliers for example 
missing employees.

Key observations: 
Our testing did not identify any material 
misstatements in the amount of revenue recognised 
or issues with the revenue recognition policy and 
judgements made.

79

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport80

Independent Auditor’s Report to the  
members of XPS Pensions Group plc (continued)

Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing our audit, and in evaluating the effect of 
misstatements. We consider materiality to be the magnitude by which misstatements, including omissions, could 
influence the economic decisions of reasonable users that are taken on the basis of the financial statements. 

In order to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that any misstatements exceed materiality, we use a 
lower materiality level, performance materiality, to determine the extent of testing needed. Importantly, misstatements 
below these levels will not necessarily be evaluated as immaterial as we also take account of the nature of identified 
misstatements, and the particular circumstances of their occurrence, when evaluating their effect on the financial 
statements as a whole. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole and 
performance materiality as follows:

Group financial statements

Parent Company financial statements

2021

2020

2021

2020

Materiality

£568,000

£546,000

£240,000

£240,000

Basis for 
determining 
materiality

Rationale 
for the 
benchmark 
applied

Performance 
materiality

Basis for 
determining 
performance 
materiality

5% of profit before tax

42% of Group 
materiality

44% of Group 
materiality

We determined profit before tax as our 
benchmark for materiality on the basis that 
profit before tax is a key performance indicator 
used by the market.

Capped at 42% (2020: 44%) of Group 
materiality given the assessment of the 
components aggregation risk.

£404,000

£382,000

£168,000

£168,000

70% of overall materiality based on our knowledge of the Group and Parent Company, history of 
errors in previous periods and management’s attitude to proposed adjustments

Component materiality
We set materiality for each component of the Group based on a percentage of between 1% to 95% of Group materiality 
dependent on the size and our assessment of the risk of material misstatement of that component. Component 
materiality ranged from £6,500 to £540,000. In the audit of each component, we further applied performance 
materiality levels of 70% of the component materiality to our testing to ensure that the risk of errors exceeding 
component materiality was appropriately mitigated.

Reporting threshold 
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them all individual audit differences in excess of £23,000 
(2020: £22,000). We also agreed to report differences below this threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on 
qualitative grounds.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Other information
The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the 
Annual Report and Accounts other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. Our opinion on the 
financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our 
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. Our responsibility is to read the other information 
and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our 
knowledge obtained in the course of the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such 
material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a 
material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude 
that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

Corporate governance statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and 
that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Parent Company’s compliance with the provisions of 
the UK Corporate Governance Statement specified for our review. 

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the 
Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained 
during the audit. 

Going concern and 
longer-term viability

• The Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going 

concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on page 73; 
and

• The Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the entity’s prospects, the period this 

assessment covers and why the period is appropriate set out on page 33.

Other Code provisions • Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 76; 

• Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and 

principal risks set out on page 33; 

• The section of the Annual Report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk 

management and internal control systems set out on pages 30-33 ; and

• The section describing the work of the Audit Committee set out on pages 46-48. 

81

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport82

Independent Auditor’s Report to the  
members of XPS Pensions Group plc (continued)

Other Companies Act 2006 reporting
Based on the responsibilities described below and our work performed during the course of the audit, we are required 
by the Companies Act 2006 and ISAs (UK) to report on certain opinions and matters as described below. 

Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Report

Directors’ 
remuneration

Matters on which 
we are required to 
report by exception

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
• the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial 
year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial 
statements; and

• the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report have been prepared in accordance with 

applicable legal requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and Parent Company and 
its environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified material 
misstatements in the Strategic Report or the Directors’ Report.

In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been 
properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the 
Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:
• adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns 
adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
• the Parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

• certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
• we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibility statement, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of 
the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the 
Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the Parent Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going 
concern basis of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with 
ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

Extent to which the audit was capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line 
with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. 
The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below:

We gained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework applicable to the Group and the industry in which it 
operates, and considered the risk of acts by the Group which were contrary to applicable laws and regulations, 
including fraud. We considered the significant laws and regulations to be the Companies Act 2006, applicable 
accounting standards, the Financial Conduct Authority’s regulations and the Listing Rules. 

We assessed the susceptibility of the financial statements to material misstatement, including fraud and discussed 
among the audit engagement team how and where fraud might occur in the financial statements and any potential 
indicators of fraud.

We considered our knowledge of the nature of the industry, control environment and business performance including 
the design of the Group’s remuneration policies, key drivers for Directors’ remuneration and performance targets. We 
considered the fraud risk areas to be management override and revenue recognition.

 
 
 
 
In response to the risk of management override, we tested the appropriateness of journal entries made through the year 
by applying specific criteria to detect possible irregularities and fraud, we performed a detailed review of the Group’s 
year-end adjusting entries, and assessed whether the judgements made in significant accounting estimates were 
indicative of potential bias. Our procedures in response to the risk of fraud in revenue recognition are set out in the Key 
Audit Matters section above.

Our procedures also included, but were not limited to: 
• agreement of the financial statement disclosures to underlying supporting documentation; 
• enquiries of management, Head of Risk, the Board and the Audit Committee concerning instances of fraud and errors, 

and actual and potential litigation and claims; 

• enquiries of the compliance department including the Head of Compliance and Money Laundering Reporting Officer 

concerning instances of fraud; 

• review of minutes of Board meetings throughout the year for any instances of fraud or error; and 
• obtaining an understanding of the control environment in monitoring compliance with laws and regulations. 

We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team members 
and remained alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.

Our audit procedures were designed to respond to risks of material misstatement in the financial statements, 
recognising that the risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting 
one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery, misrepresentations or 
through collusion. There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures performed and the further removed non-
compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less 
likely we are to become aware of it.

A further description of our responsibilities is available on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our Auditor’s Report.

Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Parent Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Parent Company’s members 
those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Parent Company and the Parent 
Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Andrew Radford (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of BDO LLP, Statutory Auditor
London, United Kingdom
23 June 2021

BDO LLP is a limited liability partnership registered in England and Wales (with registered number OC305127).

83

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport84

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Revenue
Other operating income
Administrative expenses

Profit/(loss) from operating activities
Finance income
Finance costs

Profit/(loss) before tax
Income tax (expense)/credit

Profit/(loss) after tax and total 
comprehensive income/(loss) 
for the year

Memo
EBITDA
Depreciation and amortisation
Profit/(loss) from operating activities

Year ended 31 March 2021

Year ended 31 March 2020

Trading 
items
£’000

127,931
–
(100,848)

27,083
3
(1,857)

25,229
(4,741)

Non-trading 
and 
exceptional 
items
£’000

–
421
(14,092)

(13,671)
–
(188)

(13,859)
2,334

Total
£’000

127,931
421
(114,940)

13,412
3
(2,045)

11,370
(2,407)

Non-
trading and 
exceptional 
items
£’000

–
–
(12,824)

(12,824)
–
–

(12,824)
140

Trading 
items
£’000

119,753
–
(93,488)

26,265
8
(2,378)

23,895
(3,812)

Total
£’000

119,753
–
(106,312)

13,441
8
(2,378)

11,071
(3,672)

Note

7
4
8

13
13

14

20,488

(11,525)

8,963

20,083

(12,684)

7,399

32,011
(4,928)
27,083

(7,124)
(6,547)
(13,671)

24,887
(11,475)
13,412

30,430
(4,165)
26,265

(5,671)
(7,153)
(12,824)

24,759
(11,318)
13,441

Pence 
Adjusted

Pence 

Pence 
Adjusted

Pence 

Earnings per share attributable to the 

ordinary equity holders of the Company:
33
33

Basic earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share

10.0
9.8

–
–

4.4
4.3

9.9
9.6

–
–

3.6
3.6

The notes on pages 88 to 121 form part of these Financial Statements.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
as at 31 March 2021

Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Intangible assets
Deferred tax assets
Other financial assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total assets

Liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Lease liabilities
Provisions for other liabilities and charges
Deferred income tax liabilities

Current liabilities
Lease liabilities
Provisions for other liabilities and charges
Trade and other payables
Current income tax liabilities
Deferred consideration

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity and liabilities
Equity attributable to owners of the Parent
Share capital
Share premium
Merger relief reserve
Investment in own shares held in trust
Accumulated deficit

Total equity

31 March
2021 
£'000

31 March
2020
£'000

Note

15
30
16
17
18

19
20

21
30
25
17

30
25
23
24
26

27
28
28
28
28

3,197
12,228
204,784
767
1,780

3,017
12,965
210,601
669
1,300

222,756

228,552

34,635
8,623

43,258

34,708
14,432

49,140

266,014

277,692

58,876
9,612
1,678
16,390

86,556

2,458
1,384
25,140
1,410
–

30,392

70,186
10,269
1,550
17,561

99,566

2,538
1,543
19,349
994
757

25,181

116,948

124,747

149,066

152,945

103
116,797
48,687
(2,563)
(13,958)

102
116,797
48,687
(529)
(12,112)

149,066

152,945

The notes on pages 88 to 121 form part of these Financial Statements.

The Financial Statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 23 June 2021 and were signed on its behalf by:

Snehal Shah
Chief Financial Officer
23 June 2021

Registered number: 08279139

85

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport86

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Balance at 1 April 2019
Comprehensive income and total 

comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions 

to owners:

Share capital issued
Dividends paid (note 35)
Shares purchased by Employee Benefit 

Trust for cash

Share-based payment expense – equity 
settled from Employee Benefit Trust
Share-based payment expense – IFRS 2 

charge in respect of long-term incentives 
(note 12)

Deferred tax movement in respect of 

long-term incentives (note 17)

Total contributions by and distributions 

to owners

Balance at 31 March 2020

Balance at 1 April 2020
Comprehensive income and total 

comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions 

to owners:

Share capital issued
Dividends paid (note 35)
Dividend equivalents paid on exercised 

share options

Shares purchased by Employee Benefit 

Trust for cash

Share-based payment expense – equity 
settled from Employee Benefit Trust
Share-based payment expense – IFRS 2 

charge in respect of long-term incentives 
(note 12)

Deferred tax movement in respect of 

long-term incentives (note 17)

Total contributions by and distributions 

to owners

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Share 
capital 
£'000

Share 
premium 
£'000

Merger 
relief 
reserve 
£’000

Investment 
in own 
shares 
£'000

Accumulated 
deficit  
£'000

Total 
equity/
(deficit) 
£'000

102

116,795

48,687

(167)

(9,014)

156,403

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2
–

–

–

–

–

2

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

102

102

116,797

116,797

48,687

48,687

–

1
–

–

–

–

–

–

1

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

(499)

137

–

–

(362)

(529)

(529)

–

–
–

–

7,399

7,399

–
(13,412)

2
(13,412)

–

637

(499)

774

2,132

2,132

146

146

(10,497)

(10,857)

(12,112)

152,945

(12,112)

152,945

8,963

8,963

–
(13,480)

1
(13,480)

(441)

(441)

(3,170)

–

(3,170)

1,136

(973)

163

–

–

4,082

4,082

3

3

(2,034)

(2,563)

(10,809)

(12,842)

(13,958)

149,066

Balance at 31 March 2021

103

116,797

48,687

The notes on pages 88 to 121 form part of these Financial Statements.

 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit for the year
Adjustments for:
Depreciation
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation
Finance income
Finance costs
Share-based payment expense
Other operating income
Income tax expense

Increase in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables
Decrease in provisions

Income tax paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Finance income received
Acquisition of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired
Disposal of healthcare business
Purchases of property, plant and equipment
Purchases of software
Increase in restricted cash balances – other financial assets

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from the issue of share capital net of share issue costs
Proceeds from new loans net of capitalised costs
Repayment of loans
Payment relating to extension of loan facility
Sale of own shares
Purchase of ordinary shares by EBT
Interest paid
Lease interest paid
Payment of lease liabilities
Dividends paid to the holders of the Parent
Dividend equivalents paid on exercise of share options

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at start of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

Note

15
30
16
13
13
12
4
14

13
26
19
15
16
18

27

8,963

7,399

974
2,892
7,609
(3)
2,045
4,082
(421)
2,407

856
2,567
7,895
(8)
2,378
2,132
–
3,672

28,548

26,891

(36)
6,040
(373)

(1,100)
1,284
(78)

34,179

26,997

(3,304)

(3,539)

30,875

23,458

3
(336)
104
(1,154)
(1,743)
(480)

8
(7,544)
427
(2,021)
(1,377)
(300)

(3,606)

(10,807)

1
–
(11,500)
(188)
163
(3,170)
(1,562)
(335)
(2,566)
(13,480)
(441)

2
13,250
–
–
774
(499)
(1,630)
(197)
(2,046)
(13,412)
–

(33,078)

(3,758)

(5,809)

14,432

8,893

5,539

20

8,623

14,432

In the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 31 March 2020, depreciation of right-of-use assets had been 
included within amortisation. The prior year column above has been restated to show this amount on a separate line.

Additionally, there have been prior year adjustments to provisions and trade and other receivables relating to an 
insurance reimbursement asset. The prior year movements for these categories have been restated to reflect this. This 
adjustment is within net assets in the Statement of Financial Position and there is no change in the previously reported 
total net assets or reserves.

The notes on pages 88 to 121 form part of these Financial Statements.

87

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport88

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
for the year ended 31 March 2021

1 Accounting policies
XPS Pensions Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company incorporated in the UK. The principal activity of 
the Group is employee benefit consultancy and related business services. The registered office is Phoenix House,  
1 Station Hill, Reading RG1 1NB. The Group financial statements consolidate those of the Company and its subsidiaries 
(together referred to as the ‘Group’). 

Basis of preparation 
These Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards in 
conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006, and in accordance with international financial reporting 
standards adopted pursuant to Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union. The consolidated 
financial statements have been prepared under the going concern basis.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRSs requires the use of certain critical accounting 
estimates. It also requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting 
policies. The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions and estimates are 
significant to the Financial Statements, are disclosed at the end of this section.

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the Financial Statements are set out below. The policies 
have been consistently applied to all the periods presented, unless otherwise stated. Certain items within the Statement 
of Financial Position have been restated. More information on these restatements can be found in notes 19, 23 and 25.

Functional and presentation currency
The Financial Statements are presented in British Pounds which is the Company’s functional currency. Figures are 
rounded to the nearest thousand.

Measurement convention
The financial information is prepared on the historical cost basis except for the measurement of contingent 
consideration.

Basis of consolidation
Where the Company has control over an investee, it is classified as a subsidiary. The Company controls an investee if all 
three of the following elements are present: power over the investee; exposure to variable returns from the investee;  
and the ability of the investor to use its power to affect those variable returns. Control is reassessed whenever facts and 
circumstances indicate that there may be a change in any elements of control.

Defacto control exists in situations where the Company has the practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the 
investee without holding the majority of the voting rights. In determining whether defacto control exists the Company 
considers all relevant facts and circumstances, including:

• the size of the Company’s voting rights relative to both the size and dispersion of other parties who hold voting rights; 
• substantive potential voting rights held by the Company and by other parties;
• Other contractual arrangements; and 
• historic patterns in voting attendance. 

The consolidated financial information presents the results of the Company and its subsidiaries (‘the Group‘) as if they 
formed a single entity. Intercompany transactions and balances between Group companies are therefore eliminated in full.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

The consolidated financial information incorporates the results of business combinations using the acquisition method. 
In the statement of financial position, the acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are initially 
recognised at their fair values at the acquisition date, with the exception of right-of-use assets and lease liabilities,  
which are measured at the present value of the lease liability discounted at acquisition date IBR, with an adjustment to 
right-of-use assets to reflect favourable/non-favourable lease terms. The results of the acquired operations are included 
in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income from the date on which control is obtained. They are 
deconsolidated from the date on which control ceases.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at historic cost less accumulated depreciation. For items acquired as part of 
a business combination, cost comprises the deemed fair value of those items at the date of acquisition. Depreciation 
on those items is charged over their estimated remaining useful lives from that date.

Depreciation is charged to profit and loss in the statement of comprehensive income on a straight-line basis over the 
estimated useful lives of each part of an item of property, plant and equipment. Estimated useful lives are as follows:

• Office equipment 
• Leasehold improvements 
• Fixtures and fittings 

3 to 10 years

Over remaining life of the lease

3 to 10 years

 
 
 
 
Going concern
Accounting standards require the Directors to consider the appropriateness of the going concern basis when preparing 
the Financial Statements. The Directors have taken notice of the Financial Reporting Council guidance ‘Guidance on the 
going concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency and liquidity risks’ which requires the reasons for this 
decision to be explained.

The Directors have prepared cash flow forecasts for a period including 12 months from the date of approval of these 
Financial Statements which show that during that period the Group is expected to generate sufficient cash from its 
operations to settle its liabilities as they fall due without the requirement for additional borrowings. In light of the 
Covid-19 pandemic in the UK, the Directors undertook an additional assessment of the Group’s ability to operate for the 
foreseeable future. This involved modelling a worst case scenario, which was considered by the Directors to be prudent. 
Alongside the potential downturn in revenue, mitigating cost-saving actions were identified to reduce any potential 
impact on the Group. Additionally, actions which the Group could have taken to protect the cash balance were 
identified, if the situation required them. These actions included reducing capital expenditure to exclude non-essential 
spend and reducing or freezing discretionary cost items. The worst case scenarios modelled by the Directors indicated 
that the Group was well placed to weather the continued impact of the pandemic and has sufficient liquidity to continue 
to operate and to discharge its liabilities as they fall due within the foreseeable future. For the year ended 31 March 
2022, the Directors have modelled a scenario at which the banking covenants would be broken, which is the point at 
which going concern would be threatened. The headroom between this scenario and current performance, and the 
budget, is significant and a decrease of this magnitude is considered to be unlikely.

In addition to the above, the Group negotiated an additional loan facility of £10 million until June 2021, and a relaxation 
of the Group’s banking covenants. This additional facility was not required, and the Group cancelled it early (in March 
2021). The Group in fact continued to pay down debt, with a repayment in the year of £11.5 million.

The Group’s current revolving credit facility is due to end in December 2022. The Directors have begun a process to 
negotiate a new facility, and expect that this will be concluded within FY22.

The Directors have reviewed the historical accuracy of the Group’s budgeting and forecasting. The Group’s financial 
performance in the year ended 31 March 2021 was in line with the budget demonstrating the robustness of the Group’s 
budgeting and forecasting which underpins the going concern assessment.

The Directors, after reviewing the Group’s budget and longer term forecast models, including the worst case scenario 
referred to above, conclude that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future and they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing these annual 
Financial Statements.

Intangible assets and goodwill
Goodwill represents amounts arising on acquisition, being the difference between the cost of the acquisition and the 
net fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired on a business combination. Identifiable intangibles are 
those which can be sold separately or which arise from legal rights regardless of whether those rights are separable.

Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the 
purposes of impairment testing and is not amortised. It is tested annually for impairment.

Externally acquired intangible assets are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses.

Acquired software is valued based on replacement cost valuations where identifiable or at cost less accumulated 
amortisation and impairment. Internally produced software is valued at cost less accumulated amortisation 
and impairment.

Customer relationships are valued based on the net present value of the excess earnings generated by the revenue 
streams over their estimated useful lives.

Brands valuation is based on net present value of estimated royalty returns.

Amortisation is charged to profit and loss in the statement of comprehensive income over the estimated useful lives of 
intangible assets unless such lives are indefinite. Intangible assets with an indefinite useful life, such as goodwill, are 
systematically tested for impairment at each balance sheet date. Other intangible assets are amortised from the date 
they are available for use. Estimated useful lives are as follows:

• Goodwill 
• Customer relationships* 
• Brands  
• Software 

Indefinite life

10 years, straight-line method 

10 years, straight-line method

3 to 5 years, straight-line method

*  Except for Pensions and investment customer relationships acquired as part of the Punter Southall acquisition and customer relationships recognised in 2013, all of 

which have an estimated useful life of 20 years, on a straight-line basis.

89

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport90

1 Accounting policies continued
Intangible assets and goodwill continued
The Group has reviewed the estimated useful lives for intangible assets, and has elected to make a prospective change 
to the estimated useful life for certain customer relationship assets. Previously, customer relationships recognised  
in 2013 were being amortised on a reducing balance basis over 10 years. The Group has deemed it appropriate to 
amortise these on a straight line basis over 20 years. This is consistent with the customer relationship assets within the  
PS Actuarial CGU and also is consistent with the length of customer relationships held by the Group. This change is 
prospective. This change in estimate has reduced the amortisation in the year ended 31 March 2021 by £782,000.

Contingent consideration
Contingent consideration is included in cost at its acquisition date fair value and is classified as a financial liability, 
remeasured at fair value subsequently through profit or loss. Contingent consideration classified as equity is  
not remeasured.

Impairment of non-financial assets
Assets that have an indefinite useful life, for example goodwill or intangible assets not ready for use, are not subject  
to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment. Assets that are subject to amortisation are reviewed for 
impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. 
An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. 
The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of 
assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash inflows 
(cash-generating units). Non-financial assets other than goodwill that suffered an impairment are reviewed for possible 
reversal of the impairment at each reporting date.

Financial assets
The Group classifies its financial assets into one of the categories discussed below, depending on the purpose for which 
the asset was acquired. 

Amortised cost
Amortised cost includes non-derivative financial assets where they are held within a business model whose objective is 
to hold the financial asset in order to collect contractual cash flows and those contractual terms give rise to cash flows 
on specified dates that are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. These assets 
are included in non-current assets if their maturity is greater than 12 months. Trade receivables are stated initially  
at fair value then measured at amortised cost less provisions for impairment. The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified 
approach to measuring expected credit losses using a lifetime expected credit loss provision. The expected loss rates 
are based on the Group’s historical credit losses experienced over the three-year period prior to year end. The historical 
loss rates are then adjusted for current and forward-looking information on macroeconomic factors affecting the 
Group’s customers. Any impairment required is recorded in the statement of comprehensive income within 
administrative expenses.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash balances and call deposits.

Restricted cash is cash which the Group is not entitled to receive, withdraw, transfer or otherwise deal with the Deposit, 
save as expressly permitted by the Blocked Account Agreement during the Security Period. The Security Period is the 
period beginning on the date of the Deed and ending on the date on which the Beneficiary is satisfied that the Secured 
Liabilities have been irrevocably and unconditionally paid and discharged in full and all agreements which might give 
rise to Secured Liabilities have terminated. The restricted cash has been included in non-current assets as it is expected 
that the cash will remain in the blocked account for more than 12 months after the end of the reporting period.

Financial liabilities
The Group classifies its financial liabilities into one of two categories, depending on the purpose for which the liability 
was acquired. The Group’s accounting policy for each category is as follows:

Fair value through profit or loss
This category comprises contingent consideration. The contingent consideration is carried in the consolidated 
statement of financial position at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income. 

Other financial liabilities
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial 
recognition, interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost with any difference between cost and redemption 
value being recognised in the statement of comprehensive income over the period of the borrowings on an effective 
interest basis. When borrowings are extinguished, any difference between the cash paid and the carrying value is 
recognised in the statement of comprehensive income.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
Trade payables and other short-term monetary liabilities represent liabilities for goods and services received by the 
Group prior to the end of the financial year which are unpaid. The amounts within trade payables are unsecured. They 
are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Provisions
A provision is recognised in the statement of financial position when the Group has a present legal or constructive 
obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle 
the obligation. If the effect is material, provisions are determined by discounting the expected, risk adjusted, future cash 
flows at a pre-tax risk-free rate.

Dilapidations provisions relate to the estimated cost to put leased premises back to the required condition expected 
under the terms of the lease. These include provisions for required dilapidations along with provisions where leasehold 
improvements have been made that would require reinstatement back to the original status on exit. These are uncertain 
in timing as leases may be terminated early or extended. To the extent that exits of premises are expected within 12 
months of the end of the year they are shown as current.

Professional indemnity provisions relate to complaints against the Group. The amount provided is based on 
management’s best estimate of the likely liability. These are recognised as a gross amount, with any amounts covered 
by insurance recognised as an asset within current assets, in line with IAS 37.

Social security costs provisions represent estimates of the Group’s National Insurance contributions liability on the cost 
of the Group’s Performance and Deferred Share Plans.

Provisions for liabilities and other charges have been restated for the year ended 31 March 2020 to accurately reflect the 
split between current and non-current provisions. Previously, all provisions had been shown as current. Additionally, 
professional indemnity provisions have been restated to present the gross liability within provisions. The increase in 
provision is offset by an insurance reimbursement asset, shown in current assets. The only change to the comparatives 
is in respect of these restatements. These amendments do not affect the net assets in the prior year, and do not have 
any impact on the Statement of Comprehensive Income, and so a third balance sheet has not been presented.

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares are shown in 
equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Retirement benefits: Defined contribution schemes
Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income in the year to which they relate.

Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’)
As the Group is deemed to have control of its EBT, it is treated as a subsidiary and consolidated for the purposes of 
the Consolidated Financial Statements. The EBT’s investment in the Group’s shares is deducted from equity in the 
consolidated statement of financial position as if it were treasury shares. Consideration paid (or received) for the 
purchase (or sale) of these shares is recognised directly in equity. The cost of shares held is presented as a separate 
reserve (the ’investment in own shares‘). Any excess of the consideration received on the sale of these shares over the 
weighted average cost of the shares sold is credited to retained earnings.

The equity-settled share-based payment expense represents the amount of share awards made by the Employee 
Benefit Trust on behalf of the Company as instructed by the Company. 

EBT equity-settled awards, which vest immediately on issue, are measured at the fair value of the shares issued on the 
date of the award, representing the bid price of the shares. The share based payment expense is charged to the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

Dividends
Dividends are recognised when they become legally payable. In the case of interim dividends to equity shareholders, this 
is when paid, and in the case of final dividends, this is when approved by the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting.

Revenue
Revenue, which excludes value added tax, represents the value of employee benefit consultancy and related business 
services supplied. Revenue is derived mainly from sales made in the United Kingdom. Revenue derived from outside the 
United Kingdom is immaterial.

Amounts recognised as revenue but not yet billed are reflected in the statement of financial position as accrued income 
(contract assets for adjustments relating to fixed fees as described below). All performance obligations have been 
satisfied. Amounts billed in advance of work performed are deferred in the statement of financial position as deferred 
income (contract liabilities for adjustments relating to fixed fees as described below).

91

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport92

1 Accounting policies continued
Revenue continued
Performance obligations and timing of revenue recognition
Performance obligations in contracts with customers are typically satisfied as services are rendered. In most cases, 
revenue is recognised on an over time basis. This is because effort has been expended by the business on fulfilling  
the performance obligations in the contract and the contracts would require payment for time and effort spent by  
the Group on progressing the contracts in the event of the customer cancelling the contract for any reason other than  
the Group’s failure to perform its obligations under the contract. Invoices are in most cases raised monthly, based on 
timesheet data for Pensions actuarial and consulting work and Pensions investment consulting. For Pensions 
Administration services, invoices are typically raised monthly based on services provided. Payment is typically due  
30 days from date of invoice. The services by the Group range from actuarial and investment consultancy to 
administration of pension schemes. Additionally, the Group has a SSAS and SIPP business which provides services  
to small self-administered pension schemes and self-invested pensions plans. The Group also provides a defined 
contribution master pension trust for employers offering ‘full freedom and choice’, called the National Pension Trust.

The Group has a number of customers who are on a fixed price contract. This contract covers a number of services, 
most of which are ongoing and therefore require no revenue recognition adjustment to the regular invoice issued to the 
customer. These are recognised monthly at the time of billing, as the benefit the customer receives as the work is done 
is largely in line with the amount billed each month.

For some fixed price customers, an element of the fixed fee includes the triennial valuation of their defined benefit 
pension schemes, which is a distinct performance obligation. Under IFRS 15, the Group has assessed these contracts 
and has determined that an adjustment is needed to recognise the revenue for the performance obligation relating to 
the triennial valuations in the specific periods that the work is undertaken.

Additionally, some of the fixed fee contracts include an element for investment strategic reviews. This is a distinct 
performance obligation, which has been assessed under IFRS 15 and it was determined that an adjustment is required 
to recognise the revenue for this performance obligation in the specific periods that the work is undertaken.

For the fixed fee customers where an adjustment is required, payment is made monthly over a three-year period. The 
revenue recognition for triennial valuations takes place over the 15-month period after the valuation date, so there can 
be up to 35 months variance between the date of billing and revenue recognition. For strategic reviews, the variance 
can also be up to 35 months, depending on the timing of the review within the three-year contract window. Any 
variance between the timing of payment and the timing of revenue recognition will be recognised as either a contract 
asset (where the performance obligations met to date exceed the value billed from the contract to date), or as a 
contract liability (where the value billed to date from the contract exceeds the performance obligations met to date).

Determining the transaction price and allocating amounts to performance obligations
For the contracts where an adjustment is required, the Group has identified the element of the fixed fee that is 
attributable to the triennial valuation and/or the strategic review. This has been calculated based on the expected time 
required to perform these obligations for each specific customer. To ensure that the revenue is allocated to the relevant 
period, the Group has determined the timespan for the triennial valuation work, and the separate stages of this work.  
A percentage has been applied to each stage, based on the proportion of total effort. For strategic reviews, which are a 
smaller piece of work, the Group makes an assessment at the end of each relevant period of the percentage complete 
for each review. 

Judgement is required for these contracts in determining the value attributable to the triennial valuation work and the 
strategic reviews, and also to the stage of completion at each reporting period. The judgements made are based on 
experience, and have been validated by comparison to timesheet data.

The remainder of revenue from fixed fee contracts is recognised on a monthly basis, as the services provided tend to be 
evenly spread over the life of the contract. 

Services provided under contracts which do not include a fixed fee are recognised at a price quoted within the contract 
which typically varies depending on the level of seniority of the employee providing the service. Commission income is 
recognised on renewal of scheme membership, as the performance obligations are met at the time the contract is won 
or renewed with the insurer.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
Expenses
Exceptional and non-trading items
To assist in understanding its underlying performance, the Group has defined the following items of pre-tax income and 
expense as non-trading as they either reflect items which are exceptional in nature or size or are associated with the 
amortisation of acquired intangibles. Items treated as non-trading or exceptional include:

• profits or losses on disposal of assets or businesses;
• corporate transaction and restructuring costs;
• amortisation of acquired intangibles;
• changes in the fair value of contingent consideration; 
• share-based payments; and
• the related tax effect of these items.

Any other non-recurring items are considered individually for classification as non-trading or exceptional by virtue of 
their nature or size.

The separate disclosure of these items allows a clearer understanding of the trading performance on a consistent and 
comparable basis, together with an understanding of the effect of non-recurring or large individual transactions upon 
the overall profitability of the Group.

The non-trading items have been included within the appropriate classifications in the consolidated income statement. 
Further details are given in note 6.

Leases and payments
Identifying leases
The Group accounts for a contract, or a portion of a contract, as a lease when it conveys the right to use an asset for a 
period of time in exchange for consideration. Leases are those contracts that satisfy the following criteria:

(a)  there is an identified asset;
(b)  the Group obtains substantially all the economic benefits from use of the asset; and
(c)  the Group has the right to direct use of the asset.

The Group considers whether the supplier has substantive substitution rights. If the supplier does have those rights, the 
contract is not identified as giving rise to a lease.

In determining whether the Group obtains substantially all the economic benefits from use of the asset, the Group 
considers only the economic benefits that arise from use of the asset, not those incidental to legal ownership or other 
potential benefits.

In determining whether the Group has the right to direct use of the asset, the Group considers whether it directs how 
and for what purpose the asset is used throughout the period of use. If there are no significant decisions to be made 
because they are predetermined due to the nature of the asset, the Group considers whether it was involved in the 
design of the asset in a way that predetermines how and for what purpose the asset will be used throughout the period 
of use. If the contract or portion of a contract does not satisfy these criteria, the Group applies other applicable IFRSs 
rather than IFRS 16.

All leases are accounted for by recognising a right-of-use asset and a lease liability except for:
• leases of low value assets; and
• leases with a duration of 12 months or less.

Lease liabilities are measured at the present value of the contractual payments due to the lessor over the lease term, 
with the discount rate determined by reference to the rate inherent in the lease unless (as is typically the case) this is not 
readily determinable, in which case the lessee company’s incremental borrowing rate on commencement of the lease is 
used. Other variable lease payments are expensed in the period to which they relate.

Right of use assets are initially measured at the amount of the lease liability, reduced for any lease incentives received, 
and increased for the amount of any provision recognised where the Group is contractually required to dismantle, 
remove or restore the leased asset (typically leasehold dilapidations – see note 25).

93

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport94

1 Accounting policies continued
Expenses continued
Leases and payments continued
Subsequent to initial measurement lease liabilities increase as a result of interest charged at a constant rate on the 
balance outstanding and are reduced for lease payments made. Right-of-use assets are amortised on a straight-line 
basis over the remaining term of the lease or over the remaining economic life of the asset if, rarely, this is judged to be 
shorter than the lease term. When the Group revises its estimate of the term of any lease (because, for example, it 
re-assesses the probability of a lessee extension or termination option being exercised), it adjusts the carrying amount 
of the lease liability to reflect the payments to make over the revised term, which are discounted at a new discount rate. 
The carrying value of lease liabilities is also revised when the variable element of future lease payments dependent on a 
rate or index is revised, however this will use the original discount rate. In both cases an equivalent adjustment is made 
to the carrying value of the right-of-use asset, with the revised carrying amount being amortised over the remaining 
(revised) lease term.

When the Group renegotiates the contractual terms of a lease with the lessor, the accounting depends on the nature of 
the modification:

• if the renegotiation results in one or more additional assets being leased for an amount commensurate with the 

standalone price for the additional rights-of-use obtained, the modification is accounted for as a separate lease in 
accordance with the above policy

• in all other cases where the renegotiated increases the scope of the lease (whether that is an extension to the lease 

term, or one or more additional assets being leased), the lease liability is remeasured using the discount rate 
applicable on the modification date, with the right-of-use asset being adjusted by the same amount

• if the renegotiation results in a decrease in the scope of the lease, both the carrying amount of the lease liability and 
right-of-use asset are reduced by the same proportion to reflect the partial or full termination of the lease with any 
difference recognised in profit or loss. The lease liability is then further adjusted to ensure its carrying amount reflects 
the amount of the renegotiated payments over the renegotiated term, with the modified lease payments discounted 
at the rate applicable on the modification date. The right-of-use asset is adjusted by the same amount.

For contracts that both convey a right to the Group to use an identified asset and require services to be provided to the 
Group by the lessor, the Group has elected to account for the entire contract as a lease, i.e. it does allocate any amount of 
the contractual payments to, and account separately for, any services provided by the supplier as part of the contract.

Where lease liability changes due to change in lease term (for example, due to utilisation of an extension option) a new 
discount rate is used. This rate is determined as the interest rate implicit in the lease for the remainder of the lease term, 
if that rate can be readily determined, or the Group’s incremental borrowing rate at the date of reassessment if the 
interest rate implicit in the lease cannot be readily determined. The same rate is used for changes in index rates or a rate 
used to determine future lease payments.

Foreign exchange policy
Transactions entered into by Group entities in a currency other than the functional currency (GBP) are recorded at the 
rates ruling when the transactions occur.

Any exchange rate differences are recognised immediately through the statement of comprehensive income.

Net finance costs
Net finance costs comprise interest payable, interest receivable on own funds, foreign exchange gains and losses and 
costs directly related to the raising of loans.

Interest income and interest payable is recognised in profit or loss as it accrues, using the effective interest method.

Share-based payment costs – Performance Share Plan and Deferred Share Plan
The Group operates an equity-settled, share-based compensation plan, under which the entity receives services from 
the Executive Directors and key management personnel in consideration for equity instruments of the Group. The fair 
value of the services received in exchange for the grant of the awards is recognised as an expense. The total amount to 
be expensed is determined by reference to the fair value of the awards granted:

• including any market performance conditions (for example, an entity’s share price); and 
• including the impact of any service and non-market performance vesting conditions (for example, profitability and 

remaining a Director for a specified period of time).

The Deferred Share Plans (DSPs) do not have any market performance conditions or non-market performance vesting 
conditions, they only have service vesting conditions. The fair value for DSPs is the share price on the date of grant.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
The total amount expensed to the Group is recognised over the vesting period of the award. Where a share award is 
cancelled, the share-based payment charge is accelerated at that point in time and all remaining unvested charge is 
immediately expensed to the Group.

See the Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’) policy above for information on the Employee Benefit Trust element of share-
based payment costs.

Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in profit and loss in the 
statement of comprehensive income except to the extent that it relates to items recognised in equity, in which case it is 
recognised in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial 
reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not provided 
for: the initial recognition of goodwill, the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor 
taxable profit other than in a business combination and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent 
that they will probably not reverse in the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the 
expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available 
against which the asset can be utilised.

Changes in accounting policies – New standards, interpretations, and amendments effective from 1 April 2020
New and amended Standards and interpretations issued by the IASB that apply for the first time in these annual 
financial statements (including IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements and IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in 
Accounting Estimates and Errors (amendment – definition of material), IFRS 3 Business Combinations (amendment –  
definition of Business), IFRS 9 (Interest rate benchmark reform – IBOR ‘phase 2’), and IFRS 16 (Covid-19-Related rent 
concessions)) do not impact the Group as they are either not relevant to the Group’s activities or require accounting 
which is consistent with the Group’s current accounting policies. The Group did not use IFRS 16 Covid-19 related 
rent concessions.

New standards and interpretations not yet adopted
A number of new standards, amendments to standards, and interpretations are not effective for 2021, and therefore 
have not been applied in preparing XPS Pensions Group’s financial statements. They are not expected to have a material 
impact on the Group’s consolidated Financial Statements. 

The other standards, interpretations and amendments issued by the IASB (of which some are still subject to 
endorsement by the UK), but not yet effective are not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s consolidated 
financial statements.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The Group makes certain estimates and assumptions regarding the future. Estimates and judgements are continually 
evaluated based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to 
be reasonable under the circumstances. The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis, 
with revisions to accounting estimates applied prospectively. In the future, actual experience may differ from these 
estimates and assumptions. The estimates and assumptions that have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment 
to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are discussed below.

Fair values of intangible assets
Goodwill and intangibles are tested for impairment on an annual basis at the year end and between annual tests if an 
event occurs or circumstances change that would more likely than not reduce the fair value of the cash-generating unit 
below its carrying value. These events or circumstances could include a significant change in the business climate, legal 
factors, operating performance indicators, competition, or sale or disposition of a significant portion of a reporting unit.

95

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport96

1 Accounting policies continued
Critical accounting estimates and judgements continued
Fair values of intangible assets continued
Application of the goodwill impairment test requires judgement, including the identification of cash-generating units, 
assignment of assets and liabilities to such units, assignment of goodwill to such units and determination of the fair 
value of a unit. The fair value of each cash-generating unit or asset is estimated using the income approach, on a 
discounted cash flow methodology. This analysis requires significant estimates, including estimation of future cash 
flows, which is dependent on internal forecasts, estimation of the long-term rate of growth for the business, estimation 
of the useful life over which cash flows will occur and determination of our weighted average cost of capital. See note 16 
for more detail.

Revenue recognition
Revenue is recognised once the performance obligations of the contract with the customer have been met, in line with 
IFRS 15. This may be at a point in time or over time according to when control passes to the customer. Dependent upon 
the income stream and nature of the engagement, revenue is recognised on either a time costs incurred, fixed fee or 
rateably over the period of providing the service basis. Revenue is billed on a monthly, quarterly or, in the case of SSAS 
and SIPP services, on an annual basis. Services may be billed in arrears, as in the case of pensions advisory work, or in 
advance as is the case with SSAS and SIPP revenues. As a result of such arrangements, critical accounting judgements 
are made in determining the timing of revenue recognition. These relate to identifying individual performance 
obligations and then allocating an appropriate amount of revenue to those obligations which largely depends on the 
time incurred in providing the services. Management applies judgement in assessing timesheet data to ensure that 
revenue is allocated proportionally to effort. There are significant judgements involved in determining the level of 
performance obligations met as part of the triennial valuation work. These have been recognised on the basis of work 
completed through the 15-month valuation process.

Deferred tax
Deferred tax assets are recognised for unused tax losses to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the losses can be utilised. Significant management estimates are required to determine the 
amount of deferred tax assets that can be recognised based upon the likely timing and the level of future taxable profits 
together with future tax planning strategies. Throughout the current and prior periods the Directors consider that the 
IAS 12 recognition criteria have been satisfied. The recognised deferred tax assets for the Group relate to share-based 
payments, whereby a corporation tax asset will arise in the future on the exercise of share options issued to Executive 
Directors and senior staff under performance share plans and deferred share plans. See note 17 for details of the 
carrying amount of the deferred tax assets.

Provisions
Dilapidations provisions have been made for properties which the Group currently lease based upon the cost to make 
good the property in accordance with lease terms where applicable. Provisions are made for claims in respect of 
complaints against the Group. The amount provided is based on management’s best estimate of the likely liability.  
The cost to the business is capped to the excess on the Group’s professional indemnity insurance in respect of each 
individual claim. The expected liability to the Group is disclosed as a gross figure in the provision, with the amount 
covered by the Group’s insurance disclosed as a receivable. See note 25 for more detail.

Useful lives of intangible assets
Intangible assets are amortised over their estimated useful lives with the charge recorded in administrative expenses. 
Useful lives are based on management’s estimates of the period that the assets will generate revenue, which are 
periodically reviewed for continued appropriateness. Changes to estimates can result in significant variations in the 
carrying value and amounts charged to the consolidated income statement in specific periods.

The Group has elected to make a prospective change to the estimated useful life for certain customer relationship 
assets. Previously, customer relationships recognised in 2013 were being amortised on a reducing balance basis over  
10 years. The Group has deemed it appropriate to amortise these on a straight line basis over 20 years. This is consistent 
with the customer relationship assets within the PS Actuarial CGU and also is consistent with the length of customer 
relationships held by the Group. This change is prospective. This change in estimate has reduced the amortisation in the 
year ended 31 March 2021 by £782,000, and the closing net book value of customer relationship assets is £81,294,000. 
See note 16 for further detail.

Exceptional costs
Exceptional costs are recognised to the extent that they meet the definition outlined in the accounting policy above. This 
requires a certain amount of judgement that is applied consistently by management. Due to the impact of Covid-19 in the 
year, more judgement was required in applying our exceptional item policy. As part of this assessment, a key judgement 
was to determine whether it was appropriate that holiday pay accrual met the criteria of being treated as an exceptional 
item, taking into account our Group policy and the guidance issued by the FRC. Please see note 6 for further details.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
2 Financial risk management
The XPS Pensions Group’s operations expose it to a variety of financial risks including credit risk, liquidity risk, market 
risk and the effects of changes in interest rates on debt. The Group has in place a risk management programme that 
seeks to limit the adverse effects on the financial performance of the Group by monitoring levels of debt finance and 
the related finance costs.

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise sterling cash, lease liabilities, bank deposits and bank loans 
together with trade receivables and trade payables that arise directly from its operations.

Risk management policies are established for the XPS Pensions Group of companies and the Group Audit Committee 
oversees how management monitors compliance with these policies and procedures and reviews the adequacy of the 
risk management framework in relation to the risks faced by the Group. Further details relating to the current year 
position are provided in note 29.

Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty, including brokers, to a financial 
instrument fails to meet its contractual obligations, and arises principally from the Group’s receivables from customers.

Due to the nature of the business, the majority of the trade receivables are with trustees of pension schemes and large 
institutions and losses have occurred infrequently over previous years.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s 
approach to managing liquidity is to ensure, as far as possible, that the Group will have sufficient liquidity to meet its 
liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions.

The Group’s current revolving credit facility is due to expire in December 2022. The Group has initiated the process to 
secure a new facility, and expect to complete this within FY22.

Market risk
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices such as foreign exchange rates and equity prices will affect the Group’s 
income or the value of its financial instruments. Interest rate risks are discussed in the cash flow interest rate risk below.

The Group’s financial instruments are currently in sterling, hence foreign exchange movements do not have a material 
effect on the Group’s performance.

The Group is exposed to movements in interest rate in its net finance costs and also in a small element of its operating 
revenue. Senior loans are linked to LIBOR. The Group earns income in relation to client as well as interest income on its 
own deposits.

The Group does not hold its own position in trading securities, being involved only in arranging transactions on behalf of 
its clients.

The Group does not engage in holding speculative financial instruments or derivatives. Further quantitative disclosures 
are included throughout these Consolidated Financial Statements.

Cash flow interest rate risk
The XPS Pensions Group is exposed to cash flow interest rate risk in two main respects. Firstly corporate and client 
bank deposits, which earn interest at a variable rate, although not at a material level. Secondly, interest expense arising 
on bank facilities at a margin over LIBOR.

Covid-19 risk
The Covid-19 outbreak in the UK in the early months of 2020 posed an initial risk to the Group on an operational level. 
The Group is to an extent sheltered from the full impact of Covid-19 in comparison to many businesses due to the nature 
of its activities and clients, being largely trustees of pension schemes rather than the commercial businesses. The 
Group’s Risk Management Committee holds regular meetings to discuss the ongoing situation, and the Board has taken 
steps to mitigate the impact of the virus on the Group. In March 2020, the Group took steps to enable over 98% of its 
employees to work effectively entirely from home. The IT risk environment was monitored carefully over this period – 
and additional monitoring and filtering was put in place to protect the business from threats from phishing emails. 
Mandatory IT security awareness training for employees was increased, and supplemented with phishing simulation 
tests to assess weaknesses and focus additional training. The banking covenants were renegotiated with the Group’s 
lenders, and agreement was reached to extend the Group’s revolving credit facility, as a precaution. The extension to 
the facility was not needed, and was ended early in March 2021. The covenant relaxation that was negotiated due to 
the Covid-19 pandemic has also ended, without causing any concerns in terms of meeting the original covenants.

97

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport98

3 Capital risk management
The Group is focused on delivering value for its shareholders whilst ensuring the Group is able to continue effectively as 
a going concern. Value adding opportunities to grow the business are continually assessed, although strict and careful 
criteria are applied.

The policy for managing capital is to increase shareholder value by maximising profits and cash. The policy is to set 
budgets and forecasts in the short and medium term that the Group feels are achievable. The processes for managing 
capital are regular reviews of financial data to ensure that the Group is tracking the targets set and to reforecast as 
necessary based on the most up-to-date information. This then contributes to the XPS Pensions Group’s forecast which 
ensures future covenant test points are met. The Group continues to meet these test points and they have been 
achieved over the last year.

Due to the nature of some of the services provided, two subsidiaries within the Group were regulated by the Financial 
Conduct Authority (‘FCA’) during the year. They are required to hold a minimum level of capital and this is monitored on 
a monthly basis. Formal compliance returns are submitted to the FCA in line with their reporting requirements. 

4 Other operating income
Other operating income arose from the revaluation of the contingent consideration for the Trigon acquisition in  
October 2019. The balance of the contingent consideration was paid by the Group in January 2021. Since this is not 
considered to be part of the main revenue generating activities of the Group, the Group presents this income separately 
from revenue.

Fair value adjustment of contingent consideration (notes 6, 26)

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

Year ended 
31 March  
2020  
£’000

421

–

5 Auditors’ remuneration
During the period the following services were obtained from the Group’s auditor at a cost detailed below:

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Audit services
Fees payable in respect of the Parent Company and consolidated accounts
Fees payable in respect of the subsidiary accounts

Audit related services

Non-audit services
Other assurance services

Total

Year ended 
31 March 
2021 
£’000

Year ended 
31 March 
2020 
£’000

187
140

327

43

–

–

161
130

291

44

–

–

370

335

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
6 Non-trading and exceptional items

Corporate transaction costs1
Restructuring costs2
Settlement of historical contractual dispute 
Other exceptional costs3

Exceptional items
Contingent consideration write back4
Share-based payment costs5
Amortisation of acquired intangibles6
Exceptional finance costs3

Non-trading items

Total before tax

Tax on adjusting items7

Adjusting items after taxation

Year ended 
31 March 
2021  

£’000

Year ended 
31 March 
2020  
£’000

Note

4, 26
12
16

(226)
(367)
–
(2,028)

(2,621)
421
(4,924)
(6,547)
(188)

(870)
(1,904)
(381)
(336)

(3,491)
–
(2,180)
(7,153)
–

(11,238)

(9,333)

(13,859)

(12,824)

2,334

140

(11,525)

(12,684)

1  Costs associated with aborted acquisitions of £226,000 (2020: £870,000 relating to acquisitions by the Group).
2  Costs related to the integration of prior year acquisitions of £367,000 (2020: £1,904,000, which also included costs relating to exiting the IT transitional services 

agreement linked to the Punter Southall acquisition in January 2018).

3  Other exceptional costs of £2,028,000 were incurred as a result of one off impact of Covid-19 on the business. This includes an increase in holiday pay accrual due 
to higher carry forward of annual leave by employees of £966,000 (2020: £nil), one off costs incurred in enabling home working for all employees (mainly IT costs) 
of £966,000 (2020: £265,000), and dual running costs relating to a delayed office move of £96,000 (2020: £71,000). £188,000 of exceptional finance costs  
(2020: £nil) were incurred in renegotiating the covenants and additional £10 million RCF in light of the Covid-19 pandemic. The non-cash charge for the holiday pay 
accrual arose as the holiday cycle was disrupted by the pandemic and a higher than normal level of holiday was carried forward at the end of the holiday year in 
December 2020. The holiday pay accrual has been stable prior to the pandemic. It is expected that a significant proportion of the holiday pay accrual will reverse 
out in the year ending 31 March 2022, as the Group has changed its holiday policy in the year to align the holiday year with the accounting year and as a result there 
will be no cash outflow in respect of this charge. The reversal of the accrual in the next financial year will also be treated as an exceptional credit. Due to its one off 
nature, the size of the holiday pay accrual in the year ended 31 March 2021 as well as the corresponding reversal in the next financial year, it is deemed appropriate 
to disclose the amount separately from the underlying business performance. 

4  Contingent consideration revaluation credit of £421,000 relating to the reduction in the deferred cash-settled consideration for the Trigon acquisition (2020: £nil).
5  Share-based payment expenses are included in non-trading and exceptional costs as they are significant non-cash costs which are excluded from the results for the 
purposes of measuring performance for PSP awards and dividend amounts. Additionally, the largely non-cash charges go directly to equity and so have a limited 
impact on the reserves of the Group. They are therefore shown as a non-trading item to give clarity to users of the accounts on the profit figures that dividends and 
PSP performance are based on.

6  During the year the Group incurred £6,547,000 of amortisation charges in relation to acquired intangible assets (customer relationships and brand) (2020: £7,153,000).
7  The tax credit on non-trading and exceptional items of £2,334,000 (2020: £140,000) represents 17% (2020: 0%) of the non-trading and exceptional items incurred of 
£13,858,000 (2020: £12,824,000). This is different to the expected tax credit of 19% (2020: 19%), as not all non-trading and exceptional items are allowable for tax.

7 Operating segments
In accordance with IFRS 8 Operating Segments, an operating segment is defined as a business activity whose operating 
results are reviewed by the chief operating decision-maker (‘CODM’) and for which discrete information is available. 
The Group’s CODM is the Board of Directors.

The Group has one operating segment, and one reporting segment due to the nature of services provided across the 
whole business being the same: pension and employee benefit solutions. The Group’s revenues, costs, assets, liabilities 
and cash flows are therefore totally attributable to this reporting segment. The table below shows the disaggregation 
of the Group’s revenue, by product line.

Pensions Actuarial & Consulting
Pensions Administration
Pensions Investment Consulting
National Pension Trust (‘NPT’)
SIP1

Total

1  Self Invested Pensions (SIP) business, incorporating both SIPP and SSAS products.

Year ended 
31 March 
2021  

£’000

Year ended 
31 March 
2020  
£’000

60,687
46,813
11,585
3,239
5,607

58,802
42,945
9,551
2,393
6,062

127,931

119,753

99

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
100

8 Administrative expenses
Included in the operating profit for the year are the following:

Expenses by nature
Staff costs (note 9)
Depreciation and amortisation
Operating lease costs
Premises costs (excluding rent accounted for under IFRS 16 Leases)
Exceptional items (note 6)
Other general business costs

Total

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

77,963
11,475
–
2,674
2,621
20,207

66,753
11,318
162
2,332
3,491
22,256

114,940

106,312

9 Staff numbers and costs
The average number of people employed by the Group (including Directors) during the year, analysed by category, was 
as follows:

Operational
Administration
Sales and marketing

The aggregate payroll costs of these persons were as follows:

Wages and salaries
Social security contributions and similar taxes
Defined contribution pension cost
Other long-term employee benefits
Share-based payment costs (note 12)

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  
Number of  
employees

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
Number of  
employees

1,202
93
20

1,315

1,129
58
22

1,209

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

62,050
6,529
3,131
1,329
4,924

77,963

54,537
5,692
2,804
1,540
2,180

66,753

10 Employee benefits
Defined contribution plan
The Company operates a defined contribution pension plan. Outstanding contributions at the year end were £nil 
(2020: £nil).

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
11 Directors’ emoluments
The Directors were remunerated for their services by the Group and their emoluments are disclosed below.

Aggregate emoluments
Company contributions to money purchase pension plans

Share-based payment expense for Directors was £509,000 (2020: credit of £203,000)

At 31 March 2021, retirement benefits are accruing to the following number of Directors under:

Money purchase schemes

Year ended  
31 March  
2021 
£’000

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

1,967
30

1,997

1,900
24

1,924

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  
Number of  
directors

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
Number of  
directors

3

3

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

The emoluments of the highest paid Director, including benefits and share-based payments

835

592

12 Share-based payment costs
The Group operates a number of equity-settled share-based remuneration schemes for employees: Performance Share 
Plans (PSP) for Executive Directors and other key senior personnel, and Deferred Share Plans (DSP) for key senior 
personnel from July 2020. All employees are also eligible to participate in the Save as You Earn (SAYE) scheme, the 
only vesting condition being that the individual remains an employee of the Group over the savings period. 

The Executive PSP award expense relates to annual awards over shares that vest subject to certain, stretching 
performance conditions, measured over a three-year period. Maximum ‘normal’ grant level is 150% of salary, capped 
at a maximum of 200% in exceptional circumstances. Malus and clawback provisions apply. The fair value of awards 
granted during the year was determined using certain assumptions around vesting. More information about the 
Executive PSP can be found in the Remuneration Report section of this Annual Report.

The Staff PSP (issued to key senior staff) relates to annual awards over shares that vest subject to certain performance 
conditions, measured over a three-year period. This scheme was replaced in July 2020 with a DSP, the only vesting 
criteria for the DSP is a service criteria. The fair value of awards under this scheme was determined using the share price 
on the date of grant.

Performance Share Plan awards, Deferred Share Plan awards and SAYE scheme
Social security cost on Performance Share Plan awards and Deferred Share Plan awards

Share-based payments

Bonus settled from EBT
Social security cost on bonus settled from EBT

Total

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

4,082
684

4,766

139
19

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

2,132
48

2,180

–
–

4,924

2,180

101

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport102

12 Share-based payment costs continued
The fair value of Executive PSP options granted during the period were calculated using the Monte Carlo valuation method. 
The inputs to the model were as follows:

Weighted average exercise price of options issued during the period (pence)
Expected volatility (%)
Expected life beyond vesting date (years)
Risk-free rate (%)
Dividend yield (%)

Year ended  
31 March  

Year ended  
31 March  

2021

0.05
44%
3
-0.02%
–

2020

0.05
36%
3
0.46%
–

The Staff DSP options granted during the year had no performance criteria, other than a service condition. 
Therefore, the fair value of this award was the market value of shares on the date of the award.

The fair value of Staff PSP options granted during the prior period were calculated using the Monte Carlo valuation 
method. The inputs to the model were as follows:

Weighted average exercise price of options issued during the period (pence)
Dividend yield (%)

Year ended  
31 March  

2020

0.05
–

No SAYE options were granted during the period. The inputs to the model in the prior year (using the Black-Scholes 
valuation method) were as follows:

Weighted average exercise price of options issued during the period (pence)
Expected volatility (%)
Expected life beyond vesting date (years)
Risk-free rate (%)
Dividend yield (%)

Year ended  
31 March  

2020

78.0
32%
3.35
0.42%
5.60%

For the year ended 31 March 2021, the volatility assumption, measured at the standard deviation of expected share price 
returns, is based on a statistical analysis of daily share prices over the last three years. As the Group floated in 2017, for 
the year ended 31 March 2020, the approach was to use historical volatility of other similar entities to determine a proxy 
for the Group’s volatility. The constituents of the FTSE Small Cap Index at the date of grant were used for this purpose 
for both PSP and SAYE grants.

As at 31 March 2021, in respect of the Groups ordinary shares of 0.05p each, 2,820,143 Executive PSP options had 
been granted and remained outstanding, at an exercise price of 0.05p per share, 4,875,277 Staff PSP options had been 
granted and remained outstanding, at an exercise price of 0.05p per share, 2,252,443 Staff DSP options had been 
granted and remained outstanding, at an exercise price of 0.05p per share, 13,824 SAYE options had been granted 
and remained outstanding, at an exercise price of 130.2p per share, 114,066 SAYE options had been granted and 
remained outstanding, at an exercise price of 147.2p per share, and 3,755,615 SAYE options had been granted and 
remained outstanding, at an exercise price of 78p per share. The table below includes dividend equivalent shares on 
the PSP and DSP option figures where applicable.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
Executive PSP

Staff PSP

Staff DSP

SAYE

Outstanding at 1 April
Granted during the year
Forfeited during the year
Exercised during the year
Cancelled during the year

Outstanding at 31 March

Outstanding at 1 April
Granted during the year
Forfeited during the year
Exercised during the year
Cancelled during the year

Outstanding at 31 March

Outstanding at 1 April
Granted during the year
Cancelled during the year

Outstanding at 31 March

Outstanding at 1 April
Granted during the year
Forfeited during the year
Exercised during the year
Cancelled during the year

Outstanding at 31 March

2021

2020

Weighted 
average 
Exercise 
price  

(pence)

0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05

Number

2,750,750
969,999
(201,680)
(312,235)
(287,985)

Weighted 
average 
Exercise 
price  

(pence)

0.05
0.05
0.05
–
–

Number

1,877,606
1,152,183
(279,039)
–
–

0.05

2,918,849

0.05  2,750,750

0.05
–

7,996,727
–
0.05 (1,104,040)
0.05 (1,784,325)
(62,451)
0.05

0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05

5,155,853
3,167,051
(290,712)
(30,289)
(5,176)

0.05

5,045,911

0.05

7,996,727

–
0.05
0.05

–
2,337,458
(6,180)

0.05

2,331,278

–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

82.73
–
85.06
–
111.21

4,367,675
–
(154,043)
–
(330,127)

1,821,624
139.67
4,148,818
78.0
(45,923)
119.53
130.20
(1,382)
135.61 (1,555,462)

80.22

3,883,505

82.73

4,367,675

The exercise price of options outstanding at 31 March 2021 ranged between £0.0005 (i.e. the nominal value of an 
ordinary share) in the case of the PSPs and £1.472 in the case of the SAYE scheme (2020: £0.0005 to £1.472). Their 
weighted average contractual life was 3 years (2020: 3 years).

Of the total number of options outstanding at 31 March 2021, 506,580 (2020: nil) had vested and were exercisable.
The weighted average fair value of each option granted during the year was £1.10 (2020: £0.68).

The weighted average share price on date of exercise was £1.21 (2020: £1.33).

13 Finance income and expense

Interest income on bank deposits

Finance income

Interest expense on bank loans
Other costs of borrowing
Interest on leases
Other finance expense

Finance expenses – trading

Exceptional finance costs (note 6)

Finance expenses

Year ended  
31 March  
2021 
£’000

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

3

3

1,171
317
340
29

1,857

188

2,045

8

8

1,746
315
288
29

2,378

–

2,378

Other costs of borrowing largely represent the amortisation expense of capitalised loan arrangement fees on the 
Group’s bank debt.

103

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport104

14 Income tax expense
Recognised in the statement of comprehensive income

Current tax expense
Current year
Adjustment in respect of prior year

Total current tax expense
Deferred tax (credit)/expense
Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Total income tax expense

Profit for the year
Total tax expense

Profit before income tax

Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19% (2020: 19%)
Non-deductible expenses
Other operating income not taxable
Fixed asset differences
Adjustment in respect of prior periods
Amounts credited directly to equity or otherwise transferred
Excess relief on exercise of share options
Effect of tax rate change

Total tax expense

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

3,785
(112)

3,673

(1,266)

2,407

3,687
(549)

3,138

534

3,672

Year ended  
31 March  
2021  

£’000

8,963
2,407

Year ended  
31 March  
2020  
£’000

7,399
3,672

11,370

11,071

2,160
1,002
(80)
(85)
(112)
3
(481)
–

2,407

2,103
225
–
–
(549)
146
(7)
1,754

3,672

The standard rate of corporation tax in the UK was 19% (2020: 19%). Deferred tax assets and liabilities have been 
measured at the rate they are expected to unwind at, using a rate substantively enacted at 31 March 2021, which is not 
lower than 19% (2020: 19%). Deferred tax not recognised relates to finance expense losses in a prior year and their 
future recoverability is uncertain. At 31 March 2021 the total unrecognised deferred tax asset in respect of these losses 
was approximately £1.2m (2020: £1.2m).

The Chancellor has confirmed an increase in corporation tax from 19% to 25% in the March 2021 budget. This is to take 
effect from 1 April 2023. As this rate was substantively enacted post year end, no adjustment has been made to the 
deferred tax values in these financial statements. This will however affect deferred tax rates in future years.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
15 Property, plant and equipment

Cost
Balance at 1 April 2020
Additions
Disposals

Balance at 31 March 2021

Accumulated depreciation
Balance at 1 April 2020
Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals

Balance at 31 March 2021

Net book value
Balance at 1 April 2020

Balance at 31 March 2021

Cost
Balance at 1 April 2019
Reclassification due to adoption of IFRS 16 
Additions
Disposals

Balance at 31 March 2020

Accumulated depreciation
Balance at 1 April 2019
Reclassification due to adoption of IFRS 16
Depreciation charge for the year
Disposals

Balance at 31 March 2020

Net book value
Balance at 1 April 2019

Balance at 31 March 2020

Leasehold  
improvements  

Office 
Equipment  

£’000

£’000

Fixtures 
and 
Fittings  
£’000

2,738
513
(123)

3,128

1,115
262
(123)

1,254

1,623

1,874

1,598
448
(323)

1,723

725
598
(323)

1,000

873

723

715
193
(76)

832

194
114
(76)

232

521

600

Leasehold  
improvements  

Office  
Equipment  

£’000

£’000

Fixtures 
and 
Fittings  
£’000

1,562
–
1,176
–

2,738

933
–
182
–

1,115

629

1,623

1,544
(261)
484
(169)

1,598

418
(9)
485
(169)

725

1,126

873

806
–
361
(452)

715

457
–
189
(452)

194

349

521

Total 
£’000

5,051
1,154
(522)

5,683

2,034
974
(522)

2,486

3,017

3,197

Total 
£’000

3,912
(261)
2,021
(621)

5,051

1,808
(9)
856
(621)

2,034

2,104

3,017

105

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport106

16 Intangible assets

Group

Cost
Balance at 1 April 2020
Additions
Disposals
Reassessment of fair value of net assets

Balance at 31 March 2021

Accumulated amortisation
Balance at 1 April 2020
Amortisation for the year
Disposals

Balance at 31 March 2021

Net book value
Balance at 1 April 2020

Balance at 31 March 2021

Cost
Balance at 1 April 2019
Acquired through business combinations
Additions
Disposal

Balance at 31 March 2020

Accumulated amortisation
Balance at 1 April 2019
Amortisation for the year
Disposals

Balance at 31 March 2020

Net book value
Balance at 1 April 2019

Balance at 31 March 2020

Goodwill  
£’000

Customer  
relationships  

£’000

Brands  
£’000

Software  
£’000

Total  

£’000

120,294
–
–
49

123,305
–
–
–

120,343

123,305

–
–
–

–

120,294

120,343

35,527
6,484
–

42,011

87,778

81,294

6,036
–
–
–

6,036

5,854
63
–

5,917

182

119

3,647
1,743
(314)
–

253,282
1,743
(314)
49

5,076

254,760

1,300
1,062
(314)

42,681
7,609
(314)

2,048

49,976

2,347

3,028

210,601

204,784

Goodwill  
£’000

Customer  
relationships  

£’000

Brands  
£’000

Software  
£’000

Total  

£’000

116,593
3,701
–
–

118,105
5,200
–
–

120,294

123,305

–
–
–

–

116,593

120,294

28,437
7,090
–

35,527

89,668

87,778

6,036
–
–
–

6,036

5,791
63
–

5,854

245

182

2,534
–
1,377
(264)

243,268
8,901
1,377
(264)

3,647

253,282

822
742
(264)

35,050
7,895
(264)

1,300

42,681

1,712

2,347

208,218

210,601

During the year, the amortisation rates for the Group’s various intangible assets was reviewed. The review highlighted 
that Customer relationship assets held prior to the Punter Southall acquisition had a longer expected useful life than had 
first been assessed, this was validated by performing analysis on the relationships still in existence, and by comparison 
to similar assets acquired in the Punter Southall acquisition. As a result of the work done, it was determined that the 
amortisation rate and expected useful life for these assets needed to be updated to a 20 year expected life. This change 
is considered to be an adjustment of an estimate, and is prospective. It has reduced the amortisation in the year ended 
31 March 2021 by £782,000.

At 31 March 2021, the remaining amortisation period for Customer relationships assets held prior to the Punter Southall 
acquisition in January 2018 was 12 years. The customer relationship asset acquired as part of the purchase of the Punter 
Southall group of companies for the Actuarial CGU will be amortised over 20 years, and for the Administrative CGU 
over 10 years. The customer relationships recognised from the prior year acquisitions (XPS Pensions RL Limited and 
XPS Pensions Trigon Limited) will be amortised over 10 years.

Material customer relationships included in the balance above are: customer relationships arising from the February 
2013 acquisition with a net book value (NBV) of £21.4m (2020: £23.2m), PS Actuarial customer relationships with a 
NBV of £46.4m (2020: £49.2m), PS Admin customer relationships with a NBV of £6.6m (2020: £7.6m), Kier customer 
relationships with a NBV of £2.4m (2020: £2.7m), and Royal London customer relationships with a NBV of £2.5m 
(2020: £2.8m).

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
Impairment test
Goodwill represents the excess of the consideration over the fair value of the net assets acquired on the purchase of the 
subsidiary companies listed in note 34, as well as goodwill which has arisen on the purchase of trade and assets by the 
Group. In accordance with IFRS, this balance is not amortised and is subject to annual impairment reviews.

The carrying value of goodwill was assessed based on the three cash-generating units that were identified in prior years.

The three CGUs to which goodwill has been allocated are:

CGU 1 – Former Xafinity businesses, Royal London and Trigon acquisitions
CGU 2 – PS Actuarial
CGU 3 – PS Admin

The cash-generating unit at each year end was assessed on the basis of value in use using the following assumptions, 
which reflect past experience of the Group:

Discount rate pre-tax
Terminal value after period 8
Period on which detailed forecasts are based
Growth rate during detailed forecast period 

(average)

Growth rate applied beyond approved 

forecast period to year 8

2021

2020

CGU 1

CGU 2

CGU 3

CGU 1

CGU 2

CGU 3

9.9%
2.0%
3 years

9.9%
2.0%
3 years

9.9%
2.0%
3 years

10.9%
2.0%
3 years

10.9%
2.0%
3 years

10.9%
2.0%
3 years

6.4%

5%

8.1%

5%

1.9%

5%

9.0%

5%

9.1%

5%

8.7%

5%

The discount rate comprises two elements, the cost of debt and the cost of equity, to derive a blended cost of capital 
demanded by all providers of capital. The cost of equity is based on the following components:

• Beta: calculated to estimate how volatile the Group’s equity is compared to the FTSE SmallCap index
• Risk-free rate: using a 20-year UK Government bond yield as a proxy for the risk-free rate
• Equity risk premium: the implied rate as at 31 March 2021 is used to assess the price of risk in equity markets
• Small company premium: an additional size premium is applied to the Group’s cost of equity in to account for extra risk

The cost of debt represents the cost of capital for the Group’s drawn Revolving Credit Facility and is based on average 
borrowings during the year.

The growth rate beyond the forecast period is based on a blend of average growth rates experienced by the Group and 
management’s assessment of industry and macroeconomic outlooks. Such forecast rates have been accurate in the 
past, so the Directors believe they will be sufficiently representative of actual results. The growth rate beyond the 
forecast period is not expected to include any impact from the Covid-19 outbreak.

The growth rate is applied up to 8 years, this is due to the longevity of the customer relationships held by the Group.

The impairment exercise demonstrated that there was significant headroom in all CGUs on this basis, so the Directors 
are satisfied that no impairment has arisen during the financial period.

Goodwill allocated to cash-generating units:

Goodwill – XPS Pensions Consulting Limited, XPS SIPP Services Limited, Xafinity Pensions 
Consulting Limited and subsidiaries, XPS Pensions (RL) Limited, XPS Pensions (Trigon) 
Limited (CGU 1):

Goodwill – XPS Investment Limited, XPS Pensions Limited (CGU 2):

Goodwill – XPS Holdings Limited, XPS Administration Holdings Limited, XPS Administration 

Limited (CGU 3):

2021  

£’000

2020  
£’000

28,532

79,314

28,483

79,314

12,497

12,497

120,343

120,294

107

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport108

16 Intangible assets continued
Sensitivity analysis of assumptions
The Group performed further sensitivity analysis by recalculating the fair value of the net assets of the Group on 
a ‘worst-case’ basis following the outbreak in the United Kingdom of Covid-19. For the Group, the worst-case would 
be breaching the banking covenants on leverage, as that could lead to the Group’s revolving credit facility being 
withdrawn. The size of the impact on revenue to reach this point was considered, alongside mitigating factors that 
the Group would take if necessary. This analysis showed that this potential worst case scenario is considered unlikely 
to materialise, and so there was no requirement for impairment. 

17 Deferred income tax
Analysis of the breakdown and movement of deferred tax during the year is as follows:

Property, plant and equipment
Capital gains
Short-term temporary differences
Business combinations

Balance at  
1 April  
2020  
£’000

(2)
717
(667)
16,844

16,892

Recognised  
in income  

£’000

Recognised  
in equity  
£’000

31 March  
2021  

£’000

53
–
(97)
(1,222)

(1,266)

–
–
(3)
–

(3)

51
717
(767)
15,622

15,623

Balance at  
1 April 2019  

Recognised  
in income  

£’000

£’000

Recognised  
in equity  
£’000

Acquisitions  

£’000

31 March  
2020  
£’000

31 March  
2021  
Assets  
£’000

31 March  
2021  
Liabilities  

£’000

–
–
767
–

767

51
717
–
15,622

16,390

31 March  
2020  
Assets  
£’000

31 March  
2020  
Liabilities  
£’000

Property, plant 

and equipment

Capital gains
Short-term temporary 

differences

Business combinations

(196)
717

(644)
15,653

15,530

194
–

137
203

534

–
–

(146)
–

(146)

–
–

(14)
988

974

(2)
717

(667)
16,844

16,892

2
–

667
–

669

–
717

–
16,844

17,561

Deferred income tax assets are recognised to the extent that the realisation of the related tax benefit through future 
taxable profits is probable. Deferred tax assets and liabilities have been measured at the rate they are expected to 
unwind at, using a rate substantively enacted at 31 March 2021, which is not lower than 19% (2020: 19%).

The Chancellor has confirmed an increase in corporation tax from 19% to 25% in the March 2021 budget. This is to take 
effect from 1 April 2023. As this rate has not yet been substantively enacted, no adjustment has been made to the 
deferred tax values in these financial statements. This will however affect deferred tax rates in future years. Had the 
rate been substantively enacted at 31 March 2021, the deferred tax liability would have increased by £4,389,000.

18 Other financial assets
The non-current financial asset relates to restricted cash held by the Group as security for the National Pension Trust 
(‘NPT’). For the NPT to gain approval to operate by the Pensions Regulator, the Group is required to demonstrate it can 
support the NPT in any eventuality. The Group has therefore placed £1,780,000 (2020: £1,300,000) into a restricted 
bank account, which the trustees of the NPT are able to access in certain circumstances.

There are no lifetime expected credit losses associated with this cash balance.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
19 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Less: provision for impairment of trade receivables

Net trade receivables
Accrued income
Contract assets
Insurance reimbursement asset

Total financial assets other than cash and cash equivalents carried at amortised cost
Prepayments
Accrued consideration
Other receivables includes £186,000 (2020: £186,000) of capitalised loan arrangement fees

Total trade and other receivables

31 March
2021

£’000

17,382
(350)

17,032
12,147
1,149
–

30,328
4,068
–
239

34,635

The carrying value of trade and other receivables carried at amortised cost approximates to fair value.

31 March 2021

Expected loss rate
Gross carrying amount
Loss provision
Amendment for specific bad debt provision

Total

31 March 2020

Expected loss rate
Gross carrying amount
Loss provision
Amendment for specific bad debt provision

Total

Past due 
0-30 days

Past due 
31-90 days

Past due 
more than 
90 days

0%
2,814
1
(1)

–

0%
1,225
1
(1)

–

11%
1,197
131
219

350

Current

0%
12,146
2
(2)

–

Current

Past due 
0-30 days

Past due 
31-90 days

0%
9,968
4
(4)

–

0%
4,114
3
(3)

–

0%
2,186
6
(6)

–

Past due 
more than 
90 days

15%
2,273
336
338

674

31 March
2020
Restated
£’000

18,541
(674)

17,867
11,477
1,528
350

31,222
3,086
109
291

34,708

Total 
£’000

17,382
135
215

350

Total 
£’000

18,541
349
325

674

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses using a lifetime expected credit 
loss provision for trade receivables and contract assets. The expected loss rates are based on the Group’s historical 
credit losses experienced over the three-year period prior to the period end. The historical loss rates are then adjusted 
for current and forward-looking information on macroeconomic factors affecting the Group’s customers. The Group has 
identified the gross domestic product (‘GDP’), unemployment rate and inflation rate as the key macroeconomic factors 
in the UK.

Once the IFRS 9 approach has been calculated, the Group then calculates a specific debt provision based on age of debt 
and specific client knowledge. The provision is then adjusted to take this detail into account.

Of the March 2020 contract asset balance of £1,528,000, £1,100,000 was billed in the year. Of the March 2019 contract 
asset balance of £938,000, £500,000 was billed in the year ended 31 March 2020. The March 2021 contract asset 
balance is expected to be billed in the year ending 31 March 2022 (£982,000), and the year ending 31 March 2023 
(£167,000). The March 2020 contract asset balance was to be billed in the years ending 31 March 2021 (£1,100,000) and 
31 March 2023 (£428,000).

An adjustment has been made to the prior year balance sheet, to disclose an insurance reimbursement asset of 
£350,000. This offsets with an increase in the professional indemnity provision of £350,000, so there is no overall 
impact on the net assets of the Group. The asset relates to insurance coverage on a claim which has been largely settled 
in the year ended 31 March 2021, and as such the asset has been utilised in the current year.

109

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport 
110

20 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents per statement of financial position

Cash and cash equivalents per statement of cash flows

The balance is comprised solely of cash at bank and on hand.

21 Loans and borrowings

31 March
2021
£’000

8,623

8,623

31 March
2020
£’000

14,432

14,432

31 March 2021

Drawn Revolving Credit Facility
Capitalised debt arrangement fees

Sub-total

Capitalised debt arrangement fees shown 

as current assets on balance sheet

Total

31 March 2020

Drawn Revolving Credit Facility
Capitalised debt arrangement fees

Sub-total

Capitalised debt arrangement fees shown as current 

assets on balance sheet

Total

Due within 
1 year 
(current)
£’000

–
–

–

Due 
between 
1 and 2 
years
£’000

59,000
(124)

58,876

(186)

(186)

–

58,876

Due after 
2 years
£’000

–
–

–

–

–

Sub-total 
(non-
current)
£’000

59,000
(124)

Total
£’000

59,000
(124)

58,876

58,876

–

(186)

58,876

58,690

Due within 
1 year 
(current)
£’000

–
–

–

(186)

(186)

Due 
between
1 and 2 
years
£’000

–
(186)

(186)

Due after 
2 years
£’000

Sub-total 
(non-
current)
£’000

70,500
(128)

70,500
(314)

Total
£’000

70,500
(314)

70,372

70,186

70,186

–

–

–

(186)

(186)

70,372

70,186

70,000

The book value and fair value of loans and borrowings are not materially different. 

Terms and debt repayment schedule

31 March 2021

Revolving Credit Facility – A
Revolving Credit Facility – B

31 March 2020

Revolving Credit Facility – A
Revolving Credit Facility – B

Amount
£’000

38,000
21,000

Amount
£’000

38,000
32,500

Currency

Nominal interest rate

GBP
GBP

1.5% above LIBOR
1.5% above LIBOR

Currency

Nominal interest rate

GBP
GBP

1.75% above LIBOR
1.75% above LIBOR

Year of
maturity

2022
2022

Year of
maturity

2022
2022

At 31 March 2021, the Group had drawn down £59,000,000 (2020: £70,500,000) of its £80,000,000 Revolving  
Credit Facility. The Revolving Credit Facility available to the Group was increased by £10,000,000 to £90,000,000 in  
June 2020 due to uncertainties arising from the Covid-19 pandemic, this additional £10,000,000 was not required and 
was therefore cancelled in March 2021.

The related fees for access to the facility are included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 
Capitalised loan-related costs are amortised over the life of the loan to which they relate.

Bank debt is secured by way of debentures in the Group companies which are obligors to the loans. These are XPS Reading 
Limited, XPS Consulting (Reading) Limited, XPS Pensions Consulting Limited (and its subsidiaries), Xafinity Pensions 
Consulting Limited (and its subsidiaries), XPS SIPP Services Limited, and XPS Holdings Limited (and its subsidiaries). 
The security is over all the assets of the companies which are obligors to the loans.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
The Group is in the early stages of discussions on refinancing, as the current facility ends in December 2022.  
It is expected that this process will be completed by the next balance sheet date, and so the new facility will be  
based on a replacement rate for LIBOR. It is not yet known what that rate will be.

22 Reconciliation of liabilities arising from financing activities

Long-term borrowings
Capitalised debt arrangement fees
Lease liabilities

31 March 
2020
£’000

70,500
(500)
12,807

Cash flows
£’000

(11,500)
–
(2,901)

Total liabilities from financing activities

82,807

(14,401)

Non-cash 
change
Liability to 
asset
£’000

Non-cash 
change
New leases 
/ interest 
this year
£’000

–
186
50

236

–
4
2,114

2,118

Long-term borrowings
Capitalised debt arrangement fees
Lease liabilities

31 March 
2019
£’000

57,250
(686)
261

Cash flows
£’000

13,250
–
(2,243)

Total liabilities from financing activities

56,825

11,007

Non-cash 
change
Liability to 
asset
£’000

Non-cash 
change
Adoption 
of IFRS 16
£’000

–
186
708

894

–
–
8,913

8,913

Non-cash 
change
New leases 
/ interest 
this year
£’000

–
–
5,168

5,168

31 March 
2021
£’000

59,000
(310)
12,070

70,760

31 March 
2020
£’000

70,500
(500)
12,807

82,807

23 Trade and other payables

Trade payables
Accrued expenses
Interest payable
Other payables

Total financial liabilities excluding leases, loans and borrowings, classified as financial 

liabilities at amortised cost

Other payables – tax and social security payments
Other payables – VAT
Deferred income
Contract liabilities

Total trade and other payables

31 March
2021
£’000

5,382
10,603
10
624

31 March
2020
£’000

3,190
6,967
270
176

16,619

10,603

1,934
3,802
1,557
1,228

1,551
4,723
1,276
1,196

25,140

19,349

The carrying value of trade and other payables classified as financial liabilities measured at amortised cost 
approximates to fair value. The prior year figures have been amended to move £667,000 of late trade payable invoices 
from accrued expenses to trade payables. This change has no impact on the current liabilities of the Group or 
underlying working capital.

Of the March 2020 contract liability balance of £1,200,000, £600,000 was recognised in revenue in the year.  
Of the March 2019 contract liability balance of £784,000, £500,000 was recognised in revenue in the year ended 
31 March 2020.

24 Current income tax liabilities

Tax payable

31 March
2021
£’000

1,410

1,410

31 March
2020
£’000

994

994

111

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport112

25 Provisions for other liabilities and charges

31 March 2021

Balance at 1 April 2020
Provisions made during the year
Provisions used during the year
Provisions released unused during the year

Balance at 31 March 2021

Due within one year or less
Due after more than one year

31 March 2020 – Restated

Balance at 1 April 2019
Provisions made during the year
Provisions used during the year
Provisions released unused during the year
On acquisition

Balance at 31 March 2020

Due within one year or less
Due after more than one year

Social 
security 
costs on 
Performance 
and Deferred 
Share Plans
£’000

472
624
(350)
–

746

420
326

746

Social 
security 
costs on 
Performance 
and Deferred 
Share Plans
£’000

425
47
–
–
–

472

292
180

472

Dilapidations
£’000

Professional
Indemnity
£’000

1,454
342
(84)
–

1,712

360
1,352

1,712

1,167
573
(1,065)
(71)

604

604
–

604

Dilapidations
£’000

Professional
Indemnity
£’000

517
895
(48)
–
90

1,454

84
1,370

1,454

1,091
755
(399)
(280)
–

1,167

1,167
–

1,167

Total
£’000

3,093
1,539
(1,499)
(71)

3,062

1,384
1,678

3,062

Total
£’000

2,033
1,697
(447)
(280)
90

3,093

1,543
1,550

3,093

Social security costs (National Insurance) are payable on gains made by employees on exercise of share options granted 
to them. The eventual liability to National Insurance is dependent on:

• the market price of the Group’s shares at the date of exercise;
• the number of options that will be exercised; and
• the prevailing rate of National Insurance at the date of exercise.

Dilapidations relate to the estimated cost of returning a leasehold property to its original state at the end of the lease  
in accordance with the lease terms. The cost is recognised within the depreciation of the right-of-use asset over  
the remaining term of the lease. The main uncertainty relates to estimating the cost that will be incurred at the end  
of the lease.

The dilapidations provision will be utilised at the end of the lease of the asset to which it relates.

The Group is involved in a small number of potential professional indemnity claims. The amount provided represents  
the Directors’ best estimate of the Group’s liability, after having taken legal advice. Uncertainties relate to whether 
claims will be settled out of court or if not whether the Group is successful in defending any action. Because of the 
nature of the disputes, the Directors have not disclosed future information on the basis that they believe that this  
would be seriously prejudicial to the Group’s position in defending the cases brought against it. The provision relating 
to potential professional indemnity claims is updated depending on the status of each individual claim.

Provisions for liabilities and other charges have been restated for the year ended 31 March 2020 to accurately reflect the 
split between current and non-current provisions. Previously, all provisions had been shown as current. 

Additionally, the prior year professional indemnity balance has been restated as it had been previously disclosed net of a 
£350,000 insurance receivable asset. This asset is now disclosed within Trade and other receivables in the Statement of 
Financial Position (note 19). These restatements have no overall impact on the net assets of the Group, and do not have 
any impact on the Statement of Comprehensive Income, and as such a third balance sheet has not been presented.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
26 Deferred consideration

Contingent cash consideration

Balance at 31 March 2021

Contingent cash consideration

Balance at 31 March 2020

27 Share capital

In issue at the beginning of the year
Issued during the year

In issue at the end of the year

Allotted, called up and fully paid
Ordinary shares of 0.05p (2020: 0.05p) each
Shares held by the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust
Ordinary shares of 0.05p (2020: 0.05p) each

Shares classified in shareholders’ funds

Balance at  
1 April  
2020
£’000

757

757

Balance at  
1 April  
2019
£’000

Acquisition
£’000

Fair value 
adjustment
£’000

–

–

(421)

(421)

Settled  
in year
£’000

(336)

(336)

31 March  

2021
£’000

–

–

Acquisition
£’000

Fair value 
adjustment
£’000

Settled in 
year
£’000

31 March 
2020
£’000

152

152

757

757

(4)

(4)

(148)

(148)

757

757

Ordinary
shares
(‘000)
31 March
2021

203,905
1,212

205,117

Ordinary
shares
(£’000)
31 March
2021

102
1

103

Ordinary
shares
(‘000)
31 March
2020

203,873
32

203,905

Ordinary
shares
(£’000)
31 March
2020

102
–

102

31 March
2021
(‘000)

31 March
2021
(£’000)

31 March
2020
(£’000)

31 March
2020
(£’000)

203,105

102

203,393

2,012

205,117

1

512

103

203,905

102

–

102

The Group has invested in the shares for its Employee Benefit Trust (‘EBT’). These shares are held on behalf of 
employees and legal ownership will transfer to those employees on the exercise of an award. This investment in own 
shares held in trust is deducted from equity in the consolidated statement of changes in equity.

28 Reserves
The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity:

Reserve

Description and purpose

Accumulated deficit:

All net gains and losses recognised through the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income.

Share premium:

Amounts subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value.

Merger relief reserve:

The merger relief reserve represents the difference between the fair value and nominal 
value of shares issued on the acquisition of subsidiary companies.

Investment in own shares:

Cost of own shares held by the EBT.

113

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport114

29 Financial instruments
The fair values and the carrying values of financial assets and liabilities are the same.

Financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value in the statement of financial position are grouped into 
three levels of a fair value hierarchy. The three levels are defined based on the observability of significant inputs to the 
measurement, as follows:

• Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;
• Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either 

directly or indirectly; and

• Level 3: unobservable inputs for the asset or liability.

The Group’s finance team performs valuations of financial items for financial reporting purposes, including level 3 fair 
values, in consultation with third-party valuation specialists for complex valuations. Valuation techniques are selected 
based on the characteristics of each instrument, with the overall objective of maximising the use of market-based 
information. The finance team reports directly to the Chief Financial Officer.

The Group currently holds level 2 and level 3 financial assets and liabilities.

Credit risk
The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was:

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Trade receivables
Provision for impairment of trade receivables

Net trade receivables due
Accrued income
Contract assets
Insurance reimbursement asset
Cash and cash equivalents

Credit risk mitigation
The ageing of trade receivables at the reporting date was:

Not past due
Past due 0-30 days
Past due 31-90 days
Past due more than 90 days

Movement in impairment allowance for trade receivables
Balance at start of the year
Increase during the year
Receivable written off during the year as uncollectable
Reversal of allowances

Balance at end of the year

Carrying
Amount
31 March
2021

£’000

17,382
(350)

17,032
12,147
1,149
–
8,623

38,951

Carrying
Amount
31 March
2020 
Restated
£’000

18,541
(674)

17,867
11,477
1,528
350
14,432

45,654

31 March
2021
£’000

12,146
2,814
1,225
1,197

17,382

31 March
2020
£’000

9,968
4,114
2,186
2,273

18,541

674
172
(3)
(493)

350

426
525
(13)
(264)

674

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
 
The Group prepared a forward-looking impairment model using a provision matrix based on historical data. Using this, the 
Group believes that an impairment allowance of £350,000 (2020: £674,000) is adequate in respect of trade receivables. 
Those debts which have not been provided against are considered recoverable by the Group. In accordance with IFRS 9, 
the expected credit loss (‘ECL’) model was used to calculate the impairment loss.

The Group have considered whether any provision needs to be made for credit losses on contract assets, and 
concluded that there are none.

Cash flow risk
The Group is exposed to cash flow interest rate risk in two main respects. Firstly, corporate and client bank deposits, 
which earn interest at a variable rate, although not at a material level. Secondly, interest expense arising on bank 
facilities at a margin over LIBOR.

Interest rate risk
The interest rate on long-term borrowings is a margin over LIBOR and as such the Company is at risk from 
LIBOR increases.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk arises from the Group’s working capital and the finance charges and principal repayments on its debt 
instruments. It is the risk the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting its financial obligations as they fall due.
The following table sets out the contractual maturities (representing undiscounted cash flows) of financial liabilities:

Trade and other payables
Leases
Loans and borrowings
Bank interest

Trade and other payables
Leases
Loans and borrowings
Bank interest

Up to 3
months
£’000

16,619
810
–
246

17,675

Up to 3
months
£’000

10,603
806
–
425

11,834

Between
3 and 12
months
£’000

–
1,949
–
727

2,676

Between
3 and 12
months
£’000

–
2,072
–
1,108

3,180

Between
1 and 2 
years
£’000

–
2,203
59,000
739

61,942

Between
1 and 2 
years
£’000

–
2,600
–
1,156

3,756

Between
2 and 5 
years
£’000

–
4,615
–
–

4,615

Between
2 and 5 
years
£’000

–
4,920
70,500
709

76,129

Over 5 
years
£’000

–
3,706
–
–

3,706

Over 5 
years
£’000

–
3,754
–
–

3,754

31 March
2021
£’000

16,619
13,283
59,000
1,712

90,614

31 March
2020
£’000

10,603
14,152
70,500
3,398

98,653

The Group does not have any concerns over meeting its liabilities as they fall due, as the forecasts prepared indicate 
sufficient cash receipts in each period to cover liabilities.

Capital risk
The Group’s objectives when managing capital is to maximise shareholder value whilst safeguarding the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern. Total capital is calculated as total equity in the statement of financial position.

Management of capital

Total equity

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

149,066

152,945

115

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport116

30 Leases
Nature of leasing activities (in the capacity as lessee)
The Group leases a number of properties in the UK. In some instances the rent is reviewed and may be reset periodically 
to market rental rates. In other cases the periodic rent is fixed over the lease term. The Group also leases certain  
items of equipment (photocopiers). Leases of photocopiers comprise only fixed payments over the lease terms.  
The percentages in the table below reflect the current proportions of lease payments that are either fixed or variable. 
The sensitivity reflects the impact on the carrying amount of lease liabilities and right-of-use assets if there was an uplift 
of 5% on the balance sheet date to lease payments that are variable.

31 March 2021

Property leases with periodic uplifts to market rentals
Property leases with fixed payments
Leases of plant and equipment

31 March 2020

Property leases with periodic uplifts to market rentals
Property leases with fixed payments
Leases of plant and equipment

Lease 
contracts
Number

Fixed 
payments
%

Variable 
payments
%

Sensitivity
£’000

8
9
2

19

–
25
1

26

74
–
–

74

± 307
–
–

± 307

Lease 
contracts

Fixed 
payments

Variable 
payments

Sensitivity

Number

9
9
2

20

%

–
32
2

34

%

66
–
–

66

£’000

± 293
–
–

± 293

The Group sometimes negotiates break clauses in its property leases. On a case-by-case basis, the Group will consider 
whether the absence of a break clause would expose the Group to excessive risk. Typically factors considered in 
deciding to negotiate a break clause include:

• the length of the lease term;
• whether the location represents a new area of operations for the Group.

At 31 March 2021, the carrying amounts of lease liabilities are not reduced by the amount of payments that would be 
avoided from exercising break clauses because on both dates it was considered reasonably certain that the Group 
would not exercise its right to break the lease. Total lease payments of £6,138,038 (2020: £5,867,572) are potentially 
avoidable were the Group to exercise break clauses at the earliest opportunity.

Right-of-use assets

At 1 April 2020
Additions
Depreciation
Effect of modification to lease terms

At 31 March 2021

Right-of-use assets

At 1 April 2019
Additions
Depreciation
Effect of modification to lease terms

At 31 March 2020

Land and
buildings
£’000

Office
equipment
£’000

12,738
1,906
(2,830)
249

12,063

227
–
(62)
–

165

Land and
buildings
£’000

Office
equipment
£’000

9,236
5,247
(2,511)
766

12,738

252
31
(56)
–

227

Total
£’000

12,965
1,906
(2,892)
249

12,228

Total
£’000

9,488
5,278
(2,567)
766

12,965

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
Lease liabilities

At 1 April 2020
Additions
Interest expense
Effect of modification to lease terms
Lease payments

At 31 March 2021

Lease liabilities

At 1 April 2019
Additions
Interest expense
Effect of modification to lease terms
Lease payments

At 31 March 2020

Short-term lease expense
Low value lease expense

Aggregate undiscounted commitments for short-term leases

The maturity of the lease liabilities are as follows:

Up to 3 months
Between 3 and 12 months
Between 1 and 2 years
Between 2 and 5 years
More than 5 years

31 Notes supporting statement of cash flows
Cash and cash equivalents for the purposes of the statement of cash flows comprise:

Cash at bank available on demand

Land and
buildings
£’000

Office
equipment
£’000

12,569
1,774
332
50
(2,833)

11,892

238
–
8
–
(68)

178

Land and
buildings
£’000

Office
equipment
£’000

8,913
4,849
280
708
(2,181)

12,569

261
31
8
–
(62)

238

Total
£’000

12,807
1,774
340
50
(2,901)

12,070

Total
£’000

9,174
4,880
288
708
(2,243)

12,807

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

–
–

–

168
(6)

162

Year ended
31 March
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 March
2020
£’000

724
1,734
1,947
4,137
3,528

716
1,822
2,329
4,411
3,529

12,070

12,807

Year ended
31 March
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 March
2020
£’000

8,623

14,432

117

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport118

32 Related party transactions
Key management emoluments during the year

Emoluments
Share-based payment
Company contributions to money purchase pension plans
Social security costs

Year ended
31 March
2021
£’000

1,770
509
30
200

2,509

Year ended
31 March

2020  
£’000

1,557
(203)
24
138

1,516

The aggregate gains made by the Directors on the exercise of share options amounted to £128,320 (2020: £271,550).

Non-Executive emoluments during the year

Emoluments
Social security costs

Services provided to related parties

PSFM Limited
PS Independent Trustees Limited
Punter Southall Group Limited
Psigma Investment Management Limited
Punter Southall Governance Services Limited

Year ended
31 March
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 March
2020
£’000

326
40

366

343
42

385

31 March
2020
£’000

5
14
57
3
7

86

During the period the Group provided services of £nil (2020: £85,581) to other related parties. These transactions were 
included in turnover.

All companies listed above are part of the Punter Southall Group Limited group. They are no longer related parties of 
the Group as Jonathan Punter, Chief Executive of the Punter Southall Group, resigned as a Non-Executive Director of 
XPS Pensions Group in September 2019, therefore no amounts are disclosed for the year ended 31 March 2021.

Services received from related parties

Punter Southall Group Limited
CAMRADATA Analytical Services Limited
PS Independent Trustees Limited
Donna Cuff

31 March
2020
£’000

1,823
26
9
23

1,881

During the period the Group paid administration costs of £nil (2020: £1,881,397) to other related parties. These 
transactions were included in administrative expenses.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
All companies listed above are part of the Punter Southall Group Limited group. They are no longer related parties of 
the Group as Jonathan Punter, Chief Executive of the Punter Southall Group, resigned as a Non-Executive Director of 
XPS Pensions Group in September 2019, therefore no amounts are disclosed for the year ended 31 March 2021.  
Donna Cuff is the wife of Paul Cuff (Co-CEO of XPS Pensions Group).

Amounts receivable/(payable) to related parties at the balance sheet date

Punter Southall Governance Services Limited
Punter Southall Group Limited
Punter Southall Defined Contribution Consulting Limited
Psigma Investment Management Limited
PSFM Limited

31 March
2020
£’000

5
(17)
2
3
(2)

(9)

All companies listed above are part of the Punter Southall Group Limited group. They are no longer related parties of 
the Group as Jonathan Punter, Chief Executive of the Punter Southall Group, resigned as a Non-Executive Director of 
XPS Pensions Group in September 2019, therefore no amounts are disclosed for the year ended 31 March 2021.

All transactions with related parties are made in the ordinary course of business and balances outstanding at the 
reporting date are unsecured.

33 Earnings per share

Profit for the year

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue
Diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares
Basic earnings per share (pence)
Diluted earnings per share (pence)

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

8,963

7,399

‘000

‘000

204,392
209,850
4.4
4.3

203,301
208,219
3.6
3.6

The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders divided by the 
weighted average number of shares in issue during the period.

Share awards were made to the Executive Board members and key management personnel in each year since the year 
ending 31 March 2017, these are subject to certain conditions, and each tranche of awards vest 3 years after the award 
date. Dividend yield shares relating to these awards will also be awarded upon vesting of the main awards, and will be 
settled in either cash or shares. Further shares have been issued under SAYE share schemes in the years ending 
31 March 2018 and 2019, these will vest in the years ending 31 March 2021 and 2022 respectively. These shares are 
reflected in the diluted number of shares and diluted earnings per share calculations.

Adjusted earnings per share

Adjusted profit after tax (note 6)
Adjusted earnings per share (pence)
Diluted adjusted earnings per share (pence)

Total
31 March
2021
£’000

20,488
10.0
9.8

Total 
31 March
2020
£’000

20,083
9.9
9.6

119

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport120

34 Subsidiaries
The following is the list of wholly owned companies consolidated within the Financial Statements of XPS Pensions 
Group plc.

Company name

Company
number

Principal activity

Registered address

XPS Pensions Group plc

08279139

Holding company

XPS Financing Limited

08279274

Holding company

XPS Reading Limited

08279362

Holding company

XPS Consulting (Reading) Limited

08287502

Holding company

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

XPS Pensions Consulting Limited

02459442

XPS SIPP Services Limited

SC069096

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Scotia House, Castle Business Park, 
Stirling, Stirlingshire, FK9 4TZ

Xafinity Pensions Consulting Limited

04436642

Dormant

Xafinity PT Limited

00232565

Dormant

Entegria Limited

05777554

Dormant

Xafinity Pensions Trustees Limited

01450089

Dormant

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Hazell Carr (AT) Services Limited

SC420031

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Scotia House, Castle Business Park, 
Stirling, Stirlingshire, FK9 4TZ

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Hazell Carr (SG) Services Limited

01867603

Dormant

Hazell Carr (ES) Services Limited

02372343

Dormant

Hazell Carr (PN) Services Limited

00236752

Dormant

Hazell Carr (SA) Services Limited

SC086807

Dormant

Xafinity Trustees Limited

04305500

Dormant

Xafinity Employee Benefit Trust 2013

N/A

Trust

XPS Holdings Limited

04807951

Holding Company

XPS Administration Holdings Limited

09655671

Holding Company

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Scotia House, Castle Business Park, 
Stirling, Stirlingshire, FK9 4TZ

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

JTC Trustees Limited, Elizabeth House, 
9 Castle Street, St Helier, Jersey, 
JE4 2QP

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

XPS Administration Limited

09428346

XPS Investment Limited

06242672

XPS Pensions Limited

03842603

XPS Pensions (RL) Limited

05817049

XPS Pensions (Trigon) Limited

12085392

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Employee benefit 
consultancy

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, 
Berkshire, RG1 1NB

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements (continued)for the year ended 31 March 2021 
 
 
 
35 Dividends
Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders of the Parent in the year

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

Final dividend for the year ended 31 March 2020: 4.3p per share (2019: 4.3p per share)

8,795

8,738

Interim dividend for the year ended 31 March 2021: 2.3p (2020: 2.3p) per ordinary share was 

paid during the year

4,685

4,674

13,480

13,412

The recommended final dividend payable in respect of the year ended 31 March 2021 is £9,025,000 or 4.4p per share 
(2020: £8,800,000).

The proposed dividend has not been accrued as a liability as at 31 March 2021 as it is subject to approval at the Annual 
General Meeting.

Proposed final dividend for year ended 31 March 2021

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

9,025

8,835

The Trustee of the Xafinity Employee Benefit Trust has waived its entitlement to dividends.

The Company statement of changes in equity shows that the Company has positive reserves of £12,555,000. Therefore 
there are sufficient distributable reserves in XPS Pensions Group plc in order to pay the proposed final dividend.

36 Ultimate controlling party
The Directors do not consider that there is an ultimate controlling party.

121

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport122

Statement of Financial Position – Company
as at 31 March 2021

Assets
Non-current assets
Investments
Trade and other receivables

Total assets

Current Liabilities
Trade and other payables

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity and liabilities
Share capital
Share premium
Merger relief reserve
Other reserve
Retained profit

Total equity

31 March
2021

Note

£’000

31 March
2020
Restated
£’000

5
6

7

8
9
9
9
9

26,345
217,123

22,097
200,447

243,468

222,544

243,468

222,544

39,843

39,843

39,843

33,207

33,207

33,207

203,625

189,337

103
116,797
48,687
25,483
12,555

102
116,797
48,687
21,235
2,516

203,625

189,337

The notes on pages 124 to 127 form part of these Financial Statements.

Under Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its own 
statement of comprehensive income. The profit for the financial year, of the holding Company, as approved by the 
Board, was £23,519,000 (2020: £14,224,000).

These Financial Statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 23 June 2021 and were signed on its behalf by:

Snehal Shah
Chief Financial Officer
23 June 2021

Registered number: 08279139

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
 
Statement of Changes in Equity – Company
for the year ended 31 March 2021

Balance at 1 April 2019
Comprehensive income and total 

comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions 

to owners

Share capital issued
Share-based payment expense – equity 
settled from Employee Benefit Trust
Share-based payment expense – IFRS 2 

charge in respect of long-term incentives

Deferred tax movement in respect of 

long-term incentives

Dividends paid

Total contributions by and distributions 

to owners

Balance at 31 March 2020

Balance at 1 April 2020
Comprehensive income and total 

comprehensive income for the year

Contributions by and distributions 

to owners

Share capital issued
Share-based payment expense – equity 
settled from Employee Benefit Trust
Share-based payment expense – IFRS 2 

charge in respect of long-term incentives

Deferred tax movement in respect of 

long-term incentives

Dividends paid

Total contributions by and distributions 

to owners

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
£’000

Merger 
relief
reserve
£’000

Other
reserve
£’000

Retained
profit
£’000

Total
£’000

102

116,795

48,687

18,253

1,704

185,541

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

2

–

–

–
–

2

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

773

2,063

14,224

14,224

–

–

–

2

773

2,063

146
–

–
(13,412)

146
(13,412)

2,982

(13,412)

(10,428)

102

102

116,797

116,797

48,687

48,687

21,235

21,235

2,516

2,516

189,337

189,337

–

1

–

–

–
–

1

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

163

4,082

23,519

23,519

–

–

–

1

163

4,082

3
–

–
(13,480)

3
(13,480)

4,248

(13,480)

(9,231)

Balance at 31 March 2021

103

116,797

48,687

25,483

12,555

203,625

The appropriate filing of interim accounts showing sufficient reserves to pay the £13,480,000 dividend was undertaken.

The notes on pages 124 to 127 form part of these Financial Statements.

Statement of Cash Flows – Company
for the year ended 31 March 2021

The Company does not operate a bank account and therefore there were no cash flows during the year. All movements 
of funds have been dealt with through subsidiary companies.

The notes on pages 124 to 127 form part of these Financial Statements.

123

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport124

Notes to the Financial Statements – Company
for the year ended 31 March 2021

1 Accounting policies
XPS Pensions Group plc (the ’Company‘) is a public company incorporated in the UK. The principal activity of the 
Company is that of a holding company. The registered office is Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill, Reading, RG1 1NB.

Basis of preparation
These Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards in 
conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The consolidated financial statements have been 
prepared under the going concern basis.

The preparation of Financial Statements in conformity with IFRSs requires the use of certain critical accounting 
estimates. It also requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Company’s accounting 
policies. The Company makes certain estimates and assumptions regarding the future. Estimates and judgements are 
continually evaluated based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are 
believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. There are no critical judgements or estimates to disclose.

The prior year balance sheet has been restated to reclassify related party receivables as non-current. This restatement 
has no overall impact on the net assets of the Company, however management believe this better reflects the nature of 
the receivable in line with IAS 1 and the business strategy. Whilst balances between related parties are repayable on 
demand, it is considered unlikely that the balances receivable from related parties will be settled within twelve months 
of the balance sheet date.

Measurement convention
The Financial Statements are prepared on the historical cost basis.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Investments in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are carried at cost, plus capital contributions to the Group’s subsidiary companies in respect 
of share-based payment charges, less any provisions for impairment.

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are 
shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Dividends
Dividends are recognised when they become legally payable. In the case of interim dividends to equity shareholders, this 
is when paid and in the case of final dividends, this is when approved by the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting.

Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the period comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in profit and loss in the 
statement of comprehensive income except to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity, in which 
case it is recognised in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the period, using tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted at the statement of financial position date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Changes in accounting policies – New standards, interpretations, and amendments effective from 1 April 2020
New and amended Standards and interpretations issued by the IASB that apply for the first time in these annual 
financial statements (including IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements, IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in 
Accounting Estimates and Errors (amendment – definition of material), IFRS 3 Business Combinations (amendment 
– definition of Business), IFRS 9 (Interest rate benchmark reform – IBOR ‘phase 2'), and IFRS 16 Covid-19-Related rent 
concessions)) do not impact the Company as they are either not relevant to the Company’s activities or require 
accounting which is consistent with the Company’s current accounting policies.

New standards and interpretations adopted and not yet adopted 
A number of new standards, amendments to standards, and interpretations are not effective for 2021, and therefore 
have not been applied in preparing XPS Pension Group plc’s financial statements. These standards, interpretations and 
amendments issued by the IASB (of which some are still subject to endorsement by the UK), but not yet effective are 
not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s financial statements.

 
 
 
 
2 Financial risk management
The Company is a holding company and has limited exposure to financial risks. Details of the financial risks management 
are contained in the Group accounts (note 2) and details of their application to the Company is included in Company 
note 10.

3 Capital risk management
The Company is a holding company and will apply the risk management policies of the Group contained in the Group’s 
Financial Statements.

4 Staff numbers and costs
The Company had no employees other than Directors in the year to 31 March 2021 (2020: nil).

No Directors received remuneration for their services to the company during the year. Directors were remunerated for 
their services to the Group by a subsidiary company.

Pension contributions of £nil (2020: £nil) were paid on behalf of the Directors.

5 Investments in subsidiaries

At the beginning of the year
In relation to XPS Pensions Consulting Limited
In relation to XPS SIPP Services Limited
In relation to XPS Pensions Limited
In relation to XPS Administration Limited
In relation to XPS Investment Limited
In relation to XPS Pensions (RL) Limited
In relation to XPS Pensions (Trigon) Limited

At the end of the year

31 March
2021
£’000

22,097
2,584
91
1,075
446
38
12
2

26,345

31 March
2020
£’000

19,115
1,156
72
1,006
680
61
7
–

22,097

Subsidiary

Ownership

Country of
incorporation

Class of
shares held

Principal
activities

Registered address

XPS Financing Limited

100%

England 
and Wales

Ordinary

Holding  
company

Phoenix House, 1 Station Hill,  
Reading, Berkshire, RG1 1NB

The additions to investments during the year represents amounts in respect of Performance Share Plan and Deferred 
Share Plan awards and SAYE schemes, and an equity-settled award made by the Employee Benefit Trust to subsidiary 
companies as instructed by the Company.

All other subsidiaries disclosed in note 34 of the Group accounts are indirectly owned by other Group companies.

6 Trade and other receivables

Receivables due from related parties

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

217,123

200,447

The trade and other receivables balance in the year ended 31 March 2020 has been restated as a non-current asset of 
the Company, in order to better reflect the nature of the receivable in line with IAS 1. This restatement has no overall 
impact on the net assets of the Company. 

125

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport126

Notes to the Financial Statements – Company (continued)
for the year ended 31 March 2021

7 Trade and other payables

Payables due to related parties
Other payables – corporation tax

Total trade and other payables

31 March
2021
£’000

38,312
1,531

39,843

31 March
2020
£’000

31,705
1,502

33,207

8 Share capital
Details on the share capital of the Company are contained in the Group Financial Statements.

9 Reserves

Reserve:

Share premium:

Other reserve:

Description and purpose

Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value.

The other reserve represents the amount in respect of the equity-settled awards made 
by the Employee Benefit Trust to subsidiary companies as instructed by the Company.

Merger relief reserve:

The merger relief reserve represents the difference between the fair value and nominal 
value of shares issued on the acquisition of subsidiary companies.

Retained profit:

All other net gains and losses and transactions with owners (e.g. dividends) not recognised 
elsewhere.

10 Financial instruments
The fair values and the carrying values of financial assets are the same.

Credit risk
The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was:

Receivables due from related parties

Carrying
amount
31 March
2021
£’000

Carrying
amount
31 March
2020
£’000

217,123

200,447

Loans from related parties are repayable on demand. Credit risk for receivables due from related parties has not 
increased significantly since their initial recognition.

Liquidity risk
The Company does not have any significant liquidity risk, as its receivables and payables are all with related parties.

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

 
 
 
 
Capital risk management
As part of the XPS Pensions Group, the Company is focused on delivering value for its shareholders whilst ensuring 
the Group is able to continue effectively as a going concern. Total capital for the Company comprises total equity.

The policies for managing capital are to increase shareholder value by maximising profits and cash. The policy is to 
set budgets and forecasts in the short and medium term that the Company ensures are achievable. The process for 
managing capital are regular reviews of financial data to ensure that the Company is tracking the targets set and to 
reforecast as necessary based on the most up-to-date information. This then contributes to the XPS Pensions Group’s 
forecast which ensures future covenant test points are met. The XPS Pensions Group continues to meet these test 
points and they have been achieved over the last 12 months. Further information can be found within the Consolidated 
Financial Statements of XPS Pensions Group plc.

Management of capital

Total equity

11 Related party transactions
Amounts receivable from/(payable to) related parties at the balance sheet date

Loans to related parties
Loans from related parties

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

203,625

189,337

31 March
2021
£’000

31 March
2020
£’000

217,123
(38,312)

200,447
(31,705)

178,811

168,742

All transactions with related parties are made in the ordinary course of business and balances outstanding at the 
reporting date are unsecured. Loans are repayable on demand and accrue interest at a rate in line with the Group’s bank 
borrowing rate. 1.88% was applied in the year (2020: 2.68%). All related parties are part of the XPS Pensions Group.

12 Ultimate controlling party
The Directors do not consider that there is an ultimate controlling party.

127

FinancialStatementsGovernanceStrategicReport128

Company Information

Registered Office and Directors’ Address
Phoenix House
1 Station Hill
Reading
Berkshire
RG1 1NB

Company Secretary
Zoe Adlam

Financial Adviser and Broker
Liberum Capital Limited
Ropemaker Place, Level 12
25 Ropemaker Street
London 
EC2Y 9LY

Financial Adviser and Broker
RBC Capital Markets
2 Swan Lane
London
EC4R 3BF

Legal Advisers to the Company
Macfarlanes LLP
20 Cursitor Street
London
EC4A 1LT

1
2
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A
p
u
o
r
G
s
n
o

i
s
n
e
P
S
P
X

Auditor
BDO LLP
55 Baker Street
London
W1U 7EU

Registrar
Equiniti Limited
Aspect House
Spencer Road
Lancing
West Sussex
BN99 6DA

Bankers
HSBC Bank plc
Apex Plaza, Block D, 5th Floor
Forbury Road
Reading
RG1 1AX

Notes
www.xpsgroup.com

 
 
 
 
X

P

S

P

e

n

s

i

o

n

s

G

r

o

u

p

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1

Registered Office
Phoenix House
1 Station Hill
Reading
Berkshire
RG1 1NB

T: 0118 918 5000

www.xpsgroup.com